Raymarine L1250D, L1260D, L770D, L770DRC Owner's Handbook Manual
Advertisement
Advertisement
81213_1.book Page i Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
HD Series
Fishfinders
Owner’s
Handbook
Document number: 81213_1
Date: February 2003
81213_1.book Page ii Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
81213_1.book Page iii Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
HD Series Fishfinders
HD Series Fishfinders
Owner’s Handbook
February 2003
Intended Use
Raymarine HD (High Definition) Series Fishfinders are intended for recreational fishfinding. The combined Fishfinder/Chartplotter (RC) devices are intended for recreational fishfinding and course chartplotting. The optional chartplotter function is intended as an aid to navigation and should not be relied upon as a substitute for official navigation charts.
SAFETY NOTICES
This equipment must be installed and operated in accordance with the instructions contained in this manual. Failure to do so can result in personal injury and/or navigational inaccuracies. In particular:
1. HIGH VOLTAGE.
The LCD display and digital sounder units contain high voltages. Adjustments require specialized service procedures and tools only available to qualified service technicians. There are no user serviceable parts or adjustments. The operator should never remove the unit cover or attempt to service the equipment.
CAUTION:
Removing the transducer cable from the fishfinder display or the
DSM250 while the unit is powered on can cause sparks. Only remove the transducer cable after power has been removed. As with any electronic device, be sure the units are mounted where it is well ventilated and free from gasoline fumes.
If the transducer cable is accidentally removed while the DSM250 is powered on, remove power from the sounder module, replace the transducer cable, and then return power to the module. As a safety feature, the DSM250 recognizes that the transducer is connected only at power-up.
2. NAVIGATION AID.
The chartplotter unit is only an aid to navigation. Its accuracy can be affected by many factors, including equipment failure or defects, environmental conditions, and improper handling or use. It is the user’s responsibility to exercise common prudence and navigational judgements. This unit should not be relied upon as a substitute for such prudence and judgement.
iii
81213_1.book Page iv Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM iv HD Series Fishfinders
EMC Conformance
All Raymarine equipment and accessories are designed to the best industry standards for use in the recreational marine environment.
The design and manufacture of Raymarine equipment and accessories conform to the appropriate Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) standards, but correct installation is required to ensure that performance is not compromised.
Preface
This handbook describes the following Raymarine HD Series Fishfinder systems:
• L770D Plus 7" Color LCD Fishfinder Display with DSM250 Digital
Sounder Module
• L770DRC Plus 7" Color LCD Fishfinder and Chartplotter Display with
DSM250 Digital Sounder Module
• L1260D Plus 10" Color LCD Fishfinder Display with DSM250 Digital
Sounder Module
• L1260DRC Plus 10" Color LCD Fishfinder and Chartplotter Display with
DSM250 Digital Sounder Module
The combined Fishfinder/Chartplotter display units include a cartridge holder assembly that contains two slots for C-MAP NT or NT+ chart cards.
Digital Sounder
HD Series Fishfinders come packaged with a DSM250 Sounder Module, which provides digital echo sounder image data via hsb 2 . The DSM250 digital bandwidth filter adjusts the receiver band width dynamically from very wide to very narrow, as required by the actual water and seabed conditions. This provides superior fish discrimination and bottom structure details in conditions where other fishfinders, which have a fixed bandwidth, see very little or nothing at all. The DSM250 employs a very high transmission repetition or “ping” rate which, along with the digital adaptive high sample rate receiver, ensures that the entire water column is presented in superb detail and optimal color allocation.
This handbook contains very important information on the installation and operation of your new fishfinder system. To obtain the best results in operation and performance, please read this handbook thoroughly.
81213_1.book Page v Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
HD Series Fishfinders
Transducer
Echo sounder systems require an appropriate Raymarine transducer unit and inter-connecting cable. Details for selecting and installing the transducer are described in document number 81196, Transducers for Fishfinders Owner’s
Handbook .
WARNING:
Do not cut the transducer cable or remove the connector.
Do not try to shorten or splice the cable. Cutting the transducer cable will severely reduce sonar performance.
If the cable is cut, it must be replaced—it cannot be repaired.
CUTTING THE TRANSDUCER CABLE WILL VOID THE
WARRANTY.
TFT LCD Displays
The colors of the display may seem to vary when viewed against a colored background or in colored light. This is a perfectly normal effect that will be seen with all color LCD displays.
In common with all Thin Film Transistor (TFT) LCD displays, the screen may exhibit a few (less than 20) wrongly illuminated pixels. These may appear as black pixels in a light portion of the screen or as colored pixels in black areas.
WARNING:
To provide protection against the damaging effects of UV light,
Raymarine advises that you replace the sun cover provided when the color LCD display is not in use.
Conventions Used
Throughout this handbook, the dedicated (labelled) keys are shown in bold capitals (for example: MENU ). The soft key functions, menu names and options are shown in normal capitals (for example: SCREEN ).
Operating procedures, which may consist of a single key-press or a sequence of numbered steps, are indicated by a
➤
symbol in the margin.
When the procedure requires you to press a soft key, the soft key icon is shown in the margin.
v
81213_1.book Page vi Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM vi HD Series Fishfinders
Technical Accuracy
To the best of our knowledge, the technical and graphical information contained in this handbook was correct as it went to press. However, the
Raymarine policy of continuous improvement and updating may change product specifications without prior notice. As a result, unavoidable differences between the product and handbook may occur from time to time, for which liability cannot be accepted by Raymarine.
Warranty
To register your DSM250 Digital Sounder Module ownership, please take a few minutes to fill out the warranty registration card found at the end of this handbook. It is very important that you complete the owner information and return the card to the factory in order to receive full warranty benefits.
WARNING:
CUTTING THE TRANSDUCER CABLE WILL VOID THE
WARRANTY.
OPENING A SEALED UNIT BY ANYONE OTHER THAN
QUALIFIED SERVICE TECHNICIANS WILL ALSO VOID THE
WARRANTY.
Raymarine Products and Services
Raymarine products are supported by a network of Authorized Service
Representatives. Raymarine’s Technical Services representatives or your local dealer will be available to answer any questions you may have.
For information on Raymarine products and services, contact either of the following:
United States Raymarine, Inc.
22 Cotton Road, Unit D
Nashua, NH 03063-4219
USA
Telephone: 1-603-881-5200
1-800-539-5539
Fax: 1-603-864-4756
Europe Raymarine Ltd
Anchorage Park
Portsmouth, Hampshire
England PO3 5TD
Telephone: +44 (0) 23 9269 3611
Fax: +44 (0) 23 9269 4642
81213_1.book Page vii Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
HD Series Fishfinders vii
Or, you may contact us on the World Wide Web at www.raymarine.com
.
Raymarine is a registered trademark of Raymarine Limited.
SeaTalk is a registered trademark of Raymarine Limited.
hsb 2 is a trademark of Raymarine Limited.
Pathfinder Plus is a trademark of Raymarine Limited.
This product contains technology provided under license by Acorn Group plc.
The copyright of this intellectual property is acknowledged by Raymarine,
Inc. as are Acorn’s trademarks and patents. Acorn’s world wide web address is http://www.acorn.com.
© Raymarine, Inc. 2003
81213_1.book Page viii Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM viii HD Series Fishfinders
81213_1.book Page ix Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Contents
Intended Use .............................................................................. iii
SAFETY NOTICES................................................................... iii
EMC Conformance ..................................................................... iv
Preface .................................................................................................iv
TFT LCD Displays....................................................................... v
Conventions Used ........................................................................ v
Technical Accuracy .....................................................................vi
Warranty ......................................................................................vi
Raymarine Products and Services ...............................................vi
Chapter 1: Overview ......................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 1-1
General .......................................................................................... 1-4
Operating Modes .......................................................................... 1-6
The hsb 2 System ............................................................................ 1-8
1.2 The Fishfinder Display ................................................................. 1-8
Fishfinder Options ...................................................................... 1-10
Fishfinder Functions ................................................................... 1-11
1.3 The Chartplotter Display ............................................................ 1-13
Chartplotter Display Options ...................................................... 1-14
Chartplotter Functions ................................................................ 1-16
Chapter 2: Installation ..................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 2-1
Planning the Installation ............................................................... 2-2
EMC Installation Guidelines ........................................................ 2-2
2.2 Unpacking and Inspecting the Components ................................. 2-4
2.3 Selecting the Equipment Location ................................................ 2-6
Display Unit Mounting Location .................................................. 2-6
Sounder Module Mounting Location ........................................... 2-9
2.4 Cable Runs .................................................................................. 2-10
2.5 Mounting the Display Unit ......................................................... 2-12 ix
81213_1.book Page x Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM x HD Series Fishfinders
2.6 Mounting the Sounder Module ................................................... 2-13
2.7 Display Unit Connections ........................................................... 2-15
DC Power and NMEA Connection ............................................. 2-15
Transducer Connection ............................................................... 2-17
HSB ( hsb 2 ) Connection ............................................................... 2-18
2.8 DSM250 Connections ................................................................ 2-19
DC Power Connection ................................................................ 2-19
Ground Connection .................................................................... 2-20
Transducer Connection ............................................................... 2-21
EMC Conformance ..................................................................... 2-23
2.9 Integrated Systems ...................................................................... 2-24
High Speed Bus ( hsb 2 ) ................................................................ 2-25
SeaTalk and NMEA In ................................................................ 2-27
2.10 Integrated System Checks .......................................................... 2-34
Chart Display .............................................................................. 2-34
Received Data ............................................................................. 2-34
Transmitted Data ........................................................................ 2-34
Chapter 3: Getting Started .............................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 Switching the Units On and Off .................................................... 3-1
Powering the Sounder Module ..................................................... 3-1
Powering the Display Unit ............................................................ 3-1
3.3 Operating Controls ....................................................................... 3-5
Trackpad and Cursor ..................................................................... 3-6
Dedicated Keys ............................................................................. 3-8
Soft Keys ....................................................................................... 3-9
Pop-Up Menus ............................................................................ 3-10
Database Lists ............................................................................. 3-11
3.4 Simulator Mode .......................................................................... 3-11
Viewing Simulator Data ............................................................. 3-12
Chapter 4: System Setup .................................................................................. 4-1
4.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 4-1
81213_1.book Page xi Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM xi
4.2 Changing the Set Up Parameters .................................................. 4-2
4.3 System Set Up Parameters ............................................................ 4-4
Data Boxes .................................................................................... 4-6
Bearing Mode ............................................................................... 4-6
Cursor Reference .......................................................................... 4-6
Cursor Readout ............................................................................. 4-7
Day/Night ..................................................................................... 4-7
Help ............................................................................................... 4-7
Soft Keys ....................................................................................... 4-7
Key Beep ...................................................................................... 4-7
MOB Data ..................................................................................... 4-8
Autopilot Pop Up .......................................................................... 4-8
Menu Timeout Period ................................................................... 4-8
Units .............................................................................................. 4-8
Variation Source ........................................................................... 4-8
Bridge NMEA Heading ................................................................ 4-9
NMEA-Out Set Up ..................................................................... 4-10
Cursor Echo ................................................................................ 4-11
Date and Time Settings ............................................................... 4-12
GPS SOG/COG Filter ................................................................. 4-12
Compass Set Up .......................................................................... 4-12
Language .................................................................................... 4-12
Simulator .................................................................................... 4-13
4.4 Sonar Set Up Parameters ............................................................ 4-13
Target Depth ID .......................................................................... 4-14
Color Bar ..................................................................................... 4-14
Depth Digit Size .......................................................................... 4-14
Sonar HSB Mode ........................................................................ 4-14
Depth Offset ................................................................................ 4-15
Speed Calibrate ........................................................................... 4-15
Temperature Calibrate ................................................................ 4-15
Sonar History .............................................................................. 4-15
Sonar Interference Rejection ...................................................... 4-15
Sonar Simulator .......................................................................... 4-16
Version/Serial Numbers .............................................................. 4-16
81213_1.book Page xii Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM xii HD Series Fishfinders
4.5 Chart Set Up Parameters (Raychart Models) .............................. 4-17
Customize Chart ......................................................................... 4-17
Plotter Mode ............................................................................... 4-18
Chart Orientation ........................................................................ 4-18
Object Information ..................................................................... 4-19
Palette ......................................................................................... 4-19
Waypoint Options ....................................................................... 4-19
Vectors ........................................................................................ 4-19
Radar/Chart Synch ...................................................................... 4-20
Datum Selection ......................................................................... 4-20
Position Offset ............................................................................ 4-20
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display .................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 5-1
Simulator ...................................................................................... 5-1
Changing the Brightness & Color Settings ................................... 5-1
5.2 Controlling the Display ................................................................. 5-4
Selecting the Mode of Operation .................................................. 5-4
Switching Between Sounder and Other Modes .......................... 5-10
5.3 Display Unit Control Functions .................................................. 5-11
Viewing Data Boxes ................................................................... 5-11
Changing the Scroll Speed .......................................................... 5-11
Selecting the Power Setting ........................................................ 5-13
Changing the Range .................................................................... 5-13
Selecting the Frequency .............................................................. 5-16
Using Bottom Lock ..................................................................... 5-17
Using A-Scope ............................................................................ 5-19
Using Zoom ................................................................................ 5-20
5.4 Chart Display Control Functions (Raychart Models) ................. 5-23
Customizing the Screen Presentation Options ............................ 5-23
Moving Around the Chart ........................................................... 5-25
Chapter 6: Sonar Operations ........................................................................... 6-1
6.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 Interpreting and Adjusting the Fishfinder Image .......................... 6-1
81213_1.book Page xiii Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM xiii
Fish Indications ............................................................................. 6-2
Bottom Indications ....................................................................... 6-3
Using White Line .......................................................................... 6-4
Adjusting Display Gain (Sensitivity) ........................................... 6-5
6.3 Using Alarms ................................................................................ 6-8
6.4 Using VRM to Determine Depth & Distance from Boat .............. 6-9
6.5 Waypoints ................................................................................... 6-11
Placing a Waypoint ..................................................................... 6-11
6.6 MOB ........................................................................................... 6-13
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations .......................................................... 7-1
7.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Using Chart Cards ......................................................................... 7-2
Inserting a Chart Card ................................................................... 7-2
Removing a Chart Card ................................................................ 7-3
Displaying the Chart Data ............................................................. 7-3
Displaying Chart Object and Source Information ........................ 7-4
7.3 Working with Waypoints .............................................................. 7-8
Introduction .................................................................................. 7-8
Placing a Waypoint ....................................................................... 7-9
Selecting a Waypoint .................................................................. 7-12
Waypoint Data Display ............................................................... 7-13
Editing the Waypoint Details ...................................................... 7-13
Erasing a Waypoint ..................................................................... 7-15
Moving a Waypoint .................................................................... 7-15
Using the ST60 or ST80 Navigator Keypad ............................... 7-16
7.4 Working with Routes .................................................................. 7-18
Creating a New Route ................................................................. 7-19
Saving the Current Route ............................................................ 7-22
Clearing the Current Route ......................................................... 7-24
Retrieve a Route From the Database ........................................... 7-24
Displaying Route Information .................................................... 7-25
Using the Route List to Erase and Name a Route ....................... 7-27
Editing a Route ........................................................................... 7-28
81213_1.book Page xiv Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM xiv HD Series Fishfinders
7.5 Following Routes and Going to Points ....................................... 7-30
Follow a Route ............................................................................ 7-30
Target Point Arrival .................................................................... 7-31
Other Follow Route Options ....................................................... 7-32
Going To an Individual Target Point ........................................... 7-33
Stop Follow or Stop Goto ............................................................ 7-34
7.6 Transferring Waypoints and Routes ........................................... 7-35
7.7 Using Tracks ............................................................................... 7-39
Setting Up a Track ...................................................................... 7-40
Clearing the Current Track ......................................................... 7-40
Managing Tracks ........................................................................ 7-40
SmartRoute ................................................................................. 7-42
7.8 Typical Chart Scenarios .............................................................. 7-43
Place and Goto a Waypoint ......................................................... 7-44
Make and Follow a Route ........................................................... 7-46
Review Your Passage Plan .......................................................... 7-48
Chapter 8: Advanced Chart Operations ......................................................... 8-1
8.1 Introduction .................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 Measuring Distances Using the VRM/EBL Key .......................... 8-2
8.3 Alarms and Timers ........................................................................ 8-4
Alarm Reporting ........................................................................... 8-4
Setting Alarms and Timers ........................................................... 8-5
8.4 Man Overboard (MOB) ................................................................ 8-6
8.5 Cursor Echo .................................................................................. 8-7
8.6 Radar Overlay ............................................................................... 8-7
8.7 GPS Setup ..................................................................................... 8-9
8.8 Data Log Mode ........................................................................... 8-10
Chapter 9: Maintenance and Problem Solving ............................................. 9-1
9.1 Maintenance ................................................................................. 9-1
Routine Checks ............................................................................. 9-1
Cleaning Instructions .................................................................... 9-2
81213_1.book Page xv Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM xv
EMC Servicing and Safety Guidelines ......................................... 9-3
9.2 Resetting the System ..................................................................... 9-4
Display Unit Resets ...................................................................... 9-4
Sounder Module Reset .................................................................. 9-5
9.3 Problem Solving ........................................................................... 9-6
Common Problems and Their Solutions ....................................... 9-6
Status LED .................................................................................... 9-7
9.4 Updating Software on the Display Unit ........................................ 9-8
9.5 How to Contact Raymarine .......................................................... 9-9
On the Internet .............................................................................. 9-9
In the US ....................................................................................... 9-9
In Europe ..................................................................................... 9-11
Worldwide Support ..................................................................... 9-11
Appendix A: Specifications ...............................................................................A-1
HD Series Fishfinder Displays .................................................... A-1
DSM250 Digital Sounder Module ............................................... A-4
Appendix B: Using the Auxiliary Junction Box ................................................ B-1
Raystar 112, 105, Apelco 182 and 182XT ................................... B-2
Autohelm GPS, Z260 and Z273 .................................................. B-3
Raystar 112LP (SeaTalk version) ................................................ B-4
Raystar 114 Combined GPS and Differential Beacon Receiver .. B-5
Raystar 120 WAAS Satellite Differential Receiver ..................... B-6
Appendix C: C-MAP Chart Card Features ........................................................ C-1
Appendix D: SeaTalk and NMEA Data ..............................................................D-1
Appendix E: Abbreviations ............................................................................... E-1
Index ........................................................................................................... i
81213_1.book Page xvi Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM xvi HD Series Fishfinders
81213_1.book Page 1 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 1: Overview
Chapter 1: Overview
1.1 Introduction
This handbook describes the following HD Series Fishfinders:
1-1
Fishfinder
L770D Plus
L770DRC Plus
L1260D Plus
L1260DRC Plus
Display Type
Color LCD
Color LCD
Color LCD
Color LCD
Display Size Chartplotter Digital Module
7 inch
7 inch
10.4 inch
10.4 inch
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Raymarine HD Series Fishfinders use the latest processor and sonar technology for accurate performance and echo detection. Units feature 7" or
10.4" daylight viewable color LCD displays and the Raychart (RC) models include a full C-Map NT/NT+ Chartplotter.
L770D/RC Plus and L1260D/RC Plus Fishfinders come packaged with a
DSM250 Sounder Module, which provides digital echo sounder image data via hsb 2 . The DSM250 digital bandwidth filter adjusts the receiver band width dynamically from very wide to very narrow, as required by the actual water and seabed conditions. This provides superior fish discrimination and bottom structure details in conditions where other fishfinders, which have a fixed bandwidth, see very little or nothing at all. The DSM250 employs a very high transmission repetition or “ping” rate which, along with the digital adaptive high sample rate receiver, ensures that the entire water column is presented in superb detail and optimal color allocation.
HD Series Fishfinders feature dual frequency (200 kHz and 50 kHz) operation and—depending on the transducer installed and conditions—up to 1000 watts
RMS output power and performance from 3 ft (1m) up to 5000 ft (1700 m).
Use the High Speed Bus ( hsb 2 ), SeaTalk, and NMEA interfaces to provide an integrated system with additional devices, such as Pathfinder Plus Radar,
Raymarine Autopilot, and Raystar Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) GPS products.
Connecting an HD Series Fishfinder to an hsb 2 Series Pathfinder Plus Radar and to an hsb 2 Series Plus Chartplotter enables fishfinder, radar, and chart data to be displayed on all three units. Similarly, chart data can be repeated on a fishfinder-only device from any via hsb 2 from any other hsb 2 device with chart capabilities.
81213_1.book Page 2 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
1-2 HD Series Fishfinders
This handbook describes the display unit controls and details both fishfinder and chart operations. Controls that are specific to either fishfinder or chartplotter are described in fishfinder or chart sections/chapters.
Note: Many illustrations in this handbook show example screens. The screen you see on your display depends on your system configuration and set up options, so it may differ from the illustration.
How to Use This Handbook
If you are installing the display system yourself, you should read Chapter 2 before you start the installation. This chapter also provides information that will be useful if you are connecting your fishfinder system to other equipment.
For an overview of the display unit controls, the fishfinder and the chartplotter systems, read Chapter 1 . Chapter 3 will help you start using your system.
For detailed information on sonar operations refer to Chapter 6 .
For chartplotter operating details, refer to Chapter 7 and Chapter 8 .
To change the system set up defaults, read Chapter 4 .
Chapter 2 provides planning considerations and detailed instructions for installing the fishfinder display unit and sounder module. You should refer to it when you are ready to install the system. Details to connect the display to other equipment via hsb 2 , NMEA, and SeaTalk are also provided.
Chapter 3 explains how to start using the display and describes how to use some of the basic fishfinder and chart functions and Simulator Mode.
Chapter 4 provides instructions for setting up your system to suit your preferences. You should read this chapter to determine how to change the fishfinder and chartplotter system from the default settings.
Chapter 5 details operating the display unit’s controls in Sonar mode.
Chapters 6 provides detailed operating information for the sonar functions: selecting depth range limits, adjusting gain, color and STC, setting alarms, using the VRM marker, marks and man overboard.
Chapter 7 provides detailed operating information for the standard chartplotter functions: using chart cards, plotting waypoints and routes, following routes and showing tracks. Chapter 7 also provides operating guidelines for typical chartplotter scenarios. These guidelines introduce you to many of the chartplotter functions.
Chapter 8 provides detailed operating information for further chart functions, including measuring distances, man overboard and cursor echo. It includes instructions for setting up a differential GPS.
81213_1.book Page 3 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 1: Overview 1-3
Chapter 9 provides information on user maintenance and what to do if you experience problems.
The Appendices provide additional information that you may find useful:
Appendix A lists the technical specifications for the fishfinder, sounder module, and chartplotter.
Appendix B provides details on connecting the display unit to specific GPS systems.
Appendix C defines the chart features shown on the chart display.
Appendix D defines the SeaTalk and NMEA data that is transferred on integrated systems.
A List of Abbreviations , Index , and Warranty information are included at the end of the handbook.
A summary of the fishfinder and chartplotter controls are provided on the
Quick Reference Cards supplied with your system.
Terminology
The following terminology is used to describe the various display unit configurations:
Master
Repeater
Fishfinder Display
Radar Display
Chart Display
Combined Display
Integrated System
A unit capable of sourcing specific data such as
Sonar, Chart, or Radar data.
A unit capable of displaying data from the High
Speed Bus. For example, the fishfinder display is a repeater of sonar data from the DSM250.
Unit providing Sonar Master and Radar
Repeater functionality. The L760DRC and
L1250DRC Plus displays also provide Chart
Master functionality.
Unit providing Radar Master, Sonar Repeater, and Chart Reader functionality.
Unit providing Chart Master, Sonar Repeater, and Radar Repeater functionality.
Unit providing both Sonar and Chart or Radar and Radar Repeater functionality.
Additional instruments that are connected via hsb 2 , SeaTalk, or NMEA interfaces.
81213_1.book Page 4 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
1-4 HD Series Fishfinders
Digital Sounder
Module hsb 2
A separate box containing ciruitry for receiving digital sonar data images. These images are transmitted via hsb 2 to the fishfinder display.
High Speed Bus: Links up to ten compatible display units. For full display and control between hsb 2 Plus display units, the units must be connected via hsb 2 and SeaTalk.
General
The HD Series Fishfinder system, illustrated below, is comprised of the 7" or
10.4" LCD display unit, DSM250 Digital Sounder Module, fishfinder transducer, and associated cables.
PLUS Display Unit
Digital Sounder Module
D6160-2
Transducer
Figure 1-1: Basic HD Fishfinder System hsb 2
Display Unit
The HD Series Fishfinder system is waterproof to CFR46 and can be installed either above or below deck.
The fishfinder display includes:
• 7" or 10.4" LCD display
• Trackpad
• Eleven dedicated (labeled) control keys
• Four soft keys (unlabeled) whose functionality changes
• Two slots for the C-MAP NT ® or NT+ chart cards (Raychart models only)
81213_1.book Page 5 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 1: Overview 1-5
Fishfinder Features
• Displays depth, speed, and temperature, if the transducer is so equipped
• Single or split frequency fishfinder display: 50 kHz, 200 kHz
• Display options: fishfinder window, zoom, bottom lock, and A-Scope
• Uses position data from GPS, DGPS, WAAS, or Loran-C technology
• Displays and transfers hsb 2 , SeaTalk, and NMEA data
• Provides full control of data from other hsb 2 instruments
• Half-screen windows to display additional data: depth/temperature graph,
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), Bearing and Distance Indicator (BDI), navigation data
Chartplotter Features
• Displays information from the C-MAP NT ® and NT+ chart cards
(C-Cards)
• Three full-screen operating modes: Sonar, Chart, Data Log (if appropriate data is available)
• View fishfinder and chart simultaneously
• Choice of chart orientation: Head Up, Course Up, and North Up
DSM250 Digital Sounder Module
The DSM250 module is waterproof to CFR46 and can be installed either above or below deck.
The unit includes connections to:
• power
• the transducer
• the display unit, via hsb 2
• ground
Transducer
The HD Series Fishfinders require a transducer, mounted either thru-hull, inhull, or on the transom.
Transducers can measure water depth, temperature, distance traveled, and/or speed. It is important to position your transducer correctly. For details on transducers, including location and installation instructions, see document number 81196, Transducers for Fishfinders Owner’s Handbook .
Note: If speed, temperature, or distance travelled are being input to the display unit via SeaTalk, the SeaTalk value is displayed instead of the value transmitted by the DSM250.
81213_1.book Page 6 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
1-6 HD Series Fishfinders
WARNING:
Do not cut the transducer cable or remove the connector.
Do not try to shorten or splice the cable. Cutting the transducer cable will severely reduce sonar performance.
If the cable is cut, it must be replaced—it cannot be repaired.
CUTTING THE TRANSDUCER CABLE WILL VOID THE
WARRANTY.
Operating Modes
If you have a combined Fishfinder/Chartplotter unit, three full-screen modes— fishfinder, chart, and data log—are available. You select the operating mode using the DISPLAY key as described in Chapter 5 .
In addition, if you have an hsb 2 Series Pathfinder Plus Radar display connected, you can set the display to radar mode, which provides radar functionality to the display.
If you only have an L770D Plus or L1260D Plus fishfinder-only unit connected, only sonar mode is available.
You can also set Windows On to split the display into two half-screen windows
(horizontal or vertical) to show supplementary data. Depending on the other displays connected, you can use horizontal half screens to simultaneously display sonar and chart, sonar and radar, or radar and chart windows.
Horizontal Half -Screen Window Options
Using horizontal half screens, the main operating mode is displayed in the upper window; you choose what is displayed in the lower window. The following information, if available on your system, can be shown:
Table 1-1: Horizontal Half-Screen Window Options
Full-screen mode
Sonar Mode
Horizontal Half-Screen Window Options
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), Bearing and Distance
Indicator (BDI), Depth/Temp graph, Chartplotter, Radar
Chart Mode
Radar Mode
CDI, BDI, Navigation Data (data boxes), Radar, Sonar
CDI, BDI, Navigation Data, Chartplotter, Sonar
Data Log Mode Half-screens not available
81213_1.book Page 7 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 1: Overview 1-7
Vertical Half -Screen Window Options
This option splits the sounder vertically, displaying data boxes in the left hand window. There are three different sets of data (A, B, and C) that you can select for display. The following information is available only in Sonar Mode:
Table 1-2: Vertical Half-Screen Window Options
Mode
A
B
C
Vertical Half-Screen Window Options
Temperature, Speed, Depth
Position (latitude and longitude), Course Over Ground
(COG), Speed Over Ground (SOG), Depth
Waypoint Range and Bearing, COG, SOG, Depth
Note: Receiving and displaying position data requires that a GPS is connected to your Raymarine system.
Horizontal Half-Screen
AUTO GCRZFH 50kHz
Vertical Half-Screen
AUTO GC FH
TEMPERATURE
50kHz
0 0
20
40 ft
STEER PORT
WAYPOINT 001
FREQUENCY ZOOM BTM.LOCK
60
XTE
0.28
nm
WPT BRG
351°
T
WPT RNG
26.8
nm
TTG
03 h :59 m
A-SCOPE
F
20.1
30
15.1
MINUTES
SPEED
0
10.1
DEPTH kts
20
40
FREQUENCY ZOOM ft
BTM.LOCK
A-SCOPE
D6206-1
Figure 1-2: Half-Screen Windows in Sonar Mode
Details on selecting windows are given in Chapter 3 .
For details on the Radar display, please refer to the Owner’s Handbook supplied with that unit.
Note: MARPA functionality is available on the fishfinder display if you have an integrated system with a Pathfinder radar master display that includes
MARPA as a primary function.
81213_1.book Page 8 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
1-8 HD Series Fishfinders
The
hsb 2
System
The hsb 2 (High Speed Bus) connection enables transfer of data among compatible units. For example, fishfinder data is transferred from the master display via the hsb 2 connection and can be displayed and controlled on any other hsb 2 Plus Series LCD or CRT display (the repeater display). However, if you change a setting (for example: DEPTH RANGE ) on one display, it affects all displays showing fishfinder or fishfinder/chart overlay.
In particular, you connect the DSM250 Digital Sounder Module to the L770D/
RC Plus or L1260D/RC Plus Fishfinder over the hsb 2 port. In addition, you can connect your Fishfinder to a remote hsb 2 Series Pathfinder Plus Radar and then to a remote hsb 2 Series Plus Chartplotter to provide fishfinder, chart, and radar functionality on all three displays.
Full functionality of the fishfinder is achieved when it is part of an integrated system, with other equipment (in addition to other hsb 2 Plus units) connected via SeaTalk or NMEA 0183. Data from this equipment including position and heading is displayed on the display and is used in calculations.
It is possible to connect up to ten hsb 2 Plus Series LCD or CRT displays to provide an integrated system. Earlier HSB (non-Plus) Display units can be upgraded to provide hsb 2 compatibility. See Connecting hsb2 Plus Series Units on page 2-26 for details.
Note: Please contact Raymarine Customer Service or your authorized Raymarine dealer about upgrading your existing HSB (non-Plus) display units to provide full hsb 2 Plus functionality.
The hsb 2 system can include several chartplotter displays, each with two chart cartridge slots. Each display can access two local and up to six remote chart cartridges. Charts can be controlled independently on each display, even when a remote chart cartridge is being used. Details on connecting the equipment are given in Chapter 2 .
1.2 The Fishfinder Display
When you first turn the display unit on and select Sonar mode, the scrolling bottom graph is displayed. This is a graphical representation of the echoes seen by the DSM250 and transmitted to the Fishfinder. As time passes, this display scrolls from right to left and becomes a record of the echoes seen. A typical display is shown in Figure 1-3 .
The images at the right hand side of the display are the most recent echoes.
Some echoes indicate fish and others show the bottom. It can also indicate bottom structures, such as a reef or shipwreck. The upper and lower depth range limits are shown.
81213_1.book Page 9 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 1: Overview 1-9
The fishfinder screen includes a status bar that displays transducer frequency and indicates which auto settings are enabled (Gain, Color Gain, Range,
Zoom and Frequency) and alarm status (fish and shallow/deep water depths).
You can customize the fishfinder by choosing what is displayed and how it is displayed (including language and units). For example, you can set the scroll speed of the bottom graph display and you can select the range to adjust the depth displayed.
You can view the cursor position and a variety of data (such as speed and depth) from the transducer and other equipment in user-selectable data boxes.
These data boxes can be moved around the screen and they can be switched on or off.
Chapter 5 includes details on adjusting the display. Sonar mode operations are described in Chapter 6 .
81213_1.book Page 10 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
1-10 HD Series Fishfinders
Auto
Mode
Indicators
Power
Frequency
Zoom
Range
Color gain
Gain
AUTO GCRZFH
50kHz
SD
Target Depth ID On
Frequency
Alarm enabled
Shallow, Deep
Fish
Alarm
Indicators
0 Water surface
Cursor , controlled by trackpad
18
20
22
38
32
36
35
33
36 37
42
40
Depth markers
Target image (return)
Target image depth
Bottom depth
FREQUENCY ZOOM ft
BTM.LOCK
60
A-SCOPE
D6181-1
Figure 1-3: Typical Fishfinder Display
Range
Fishfinder Options
The fishfinder provides controls to select additional modes:
• Frequency – you can select the transducer frequency, 50 kHz for wide coverage and deep water, 200 kHz for a detailed view, both frequencies simultaneously or auto-frequency. The default setting is auto-frequency, which determines the optimum frequency of operation based on the current depth.
• Bottom Lock – changes the operating mode to reset the bottom, providing a bottom-up view: The bottom is used as the reference, with its image flattened. Bottom lock mode is used primarily to filter out the bottom structure and display fish details only.
81213_1.book Page 11 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 1: Overview 1-11
• A-Scope – displays a real-time image of the bottom structure and fish directly below the transducer. The A-Scope window also displays the patented Bottom Coverage width indication.
• Zoom – enlarges all or part of the bottom graph display. You can select x2, x4, or x6 magnification and the zoom area can be automatically or manually adjusted.
You can select the Zoom or Bottom Lock image to be displayed in place of the regular bottom graph display. Alternatively, you can set the display window to be split vertically with the bottom graph displayed in the right hand screen and the Zoom or Bottom Lock image displayed in the left hand screen. See
Figure 1-4 .
If you choose dual frequency, the scrolling bottom graph is displayed in both frequencies, split horizontally. Zoom, Bottom Lock, or A-Scope can be displayed with the dual frequency graph.
All of these options are available when the fishfinder is displayed in a halfscreen window.
Fishfinder Functions
The HD Series Fishfinder includes the following functions:
• Automatic or manual selection of scroll speed for bottom graph display
• Automatic or manual selection of transducer frequency
• Automatic or manual selection of depth range limits
• Automatic or manual selection of Gain, Color Gain, and STC settings
• Adjustment of foreground/background color and image color threshold
• Set up alarms for Fish, Shallow water, and Deep water
• VRM marker to determine depth and distance
• Add marks to record important or dangerous locations
• Man Overboard (MOB) to navigate back to a person or object
Operation of these fishfinder functions is described in Chapter 3 and
Chapter 6 .
81213_1.book Page 12 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
1-12 HD Series Fishfinders
AUTO GC Z H SPLIT
40
60
80
0
20
20
0
AUTO GC Z H SPLIT
20
0
40
60
80
0
20
6.8
40 40
60
FREQUENCY
Split Frequency
AUTO GC Z H
ZOOM ft
BTM.LOCK
80
A-SCOPE
200kHz
0
60
FREQUENCY ZOOM ft
Split Frequency with A-Scope
80
BTM.LOCK
AUTO GC Z H
SPLIT
55
A-SCOPE
0
20
30
20 40
20
10
40
50kHz
75
55
60
80
0
20
0
60 40
BL X4
60 ft
FREQUENCY ZOOM BTM.LOCK
Bottom Lock Split with Bottom Graph
A-SCOPE
Figure 1-4: Fishfinder Display Options
FREQUENCY ZOOM ft
75
BTM.LOCK
Zoom Split with Split Frequency
80
A-SCOPE
D6202-1
81213_1.book Page 13 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 1: Overview 1-13
1.3 The Chartplotter Display
The L770DRC and L1260DRC Plus Fishfinders include a Chartplotter. The chartplotter includes a small-scale world map and detailed navigation information is displayed when a cartographic chart card is installed. The details displayed depend on the chart zoom level selected. A plotter mode is provided to enable route plotting and tracking at large scales even when a chart card is not installed A typical chartplotter screen is shown in Figure 1-5 .
Note: For an L770D Plus or L1260D Plus fishfinder-only unit to have access to chartplotter functionality, it must be connected to an hsb 2 Plus Series Chartplotter device. This is discussed fully in Section 2.9, Integrated Systems.
The chartplotter uses position information from a GPS, DGPS, WAAS, or
Loran-C instrument. Once the position fix has been established, your vessel’s position, if on screen, is shown as a boat shape pointing in the direction of the current heading (or COG if heading data is not available). If no heading or
COG data is available, the vessel is shown as a circle.
The chartplotter screen includes a status bar that displays chart scale, with either cursor position, range and bearing or, when the cursor is homed to the vessel (by pressing FIND SHIP) , vessel position, Speed Over Ground (SOG),
Course Over Ground (COG) and fix type (VES POS, DIF FIX or SD FIX).
The status bar also indicates if radar/chart overlay is switched on.
Any waypoints you have placed are displayed (unless you turned them off in
Chart Set Up as described in Chapter 4 ) and the current route is shown.
Information can be viewed on-screen by positioning the cursor over a waypoint, current route or chart object. The chartplotter screen can also show additional information, depending on your currently selected options, set up selections and data available from other equipment.
An example chart display, in its default configuration, with a chart card installed, is shown in the following illustration.
Several functions are available to control the display as follows:
• Zoom in/out and Pan the Display
• Offset the Chart or Center the Chart around the Vessel
• Overlay Radar Targets onto the Chart Display (if radar data is available)
• Synchronize the Chart and Radar (if radar data is available)
Operation of these functions is described in Chapter 5 .
81213_1.book Page 14 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
1-14 HD Series Fishfinders
Chartplotter Display Options
Set up options enable you to customize the chart by choosing what is displayed
(including cartographic features), how it is displayed (including language and units), heading mode and how the chartplotter operates. You can also view the cursor position and a variety of data from other equipment (for example: speed, heading, depth, wind, and tide information) in a set of user-selectable data boxes. The cursor box and user-selected data boxes can be moved around the screen and they can be turned on or off. You can also obtain autopilot status and locked heading information.
Display options are provided in System Set Up and Chart Set Up as described in Chapter 4 . Chart set up options enable you to customize the chart by selecting:
• What cartographic features and level of detail are displayed
• The chart color palette (shade or sunlight)
• Chart orientation (north up, head up or course up), datums and position offset
• How waypoints are displayed (symbols and numbers) and how chart object information is displayed
• Vectors for heading, COG and tide
In addition Screen Presentation Options, described in Chapter 5 are provided to switch:
• Cursor Box and Data Boxes On/Off
• Chart Grid On/Off
• Custom Chart Details On/Off
Note: When you turn the display off and on again, these settings are retained in memory.
81213_1.book Page 15 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 1: Overview
Chart Range
Status Bar
1-15
Chart Boundary
Waypoint
Vessel Position
Cursor selecting chart object
Depth Area
Object data box - for object selected by cursor
Default soft key labels
These can be turned off: press any soft key to redisplay them.
Different labels are displayed when you press a key.
Cursor position box
Shows the current cursor position as either Range/Bearing or Lat/Long. You can move this box to your preferred position on the screen or turn it off.
D4275-3
Figure 1-5: Typical Chartplotter Display
Custom Chart Details
The chartplotter set up options include a sub-menu to customize the cartographic features. This menu enables you to switch features on and off, or to control them using the CUSTOM soft key. The factory default settings for the
Custom chart options are as follows:
ON : Chart text, chart boundaries, depth contours, navigation marks and land features.
OFF : Caution and routing data.
CUSTOM : Spot sounding, light sectors, marine features.
Note: The factory default for the CUSTOM settings is ON
.
Icons are displayed in detail, depth shading limit is 10 m and depth contour display is 0-100 m.
A complete list of chart features is given in Appendix C .
81213_1.book Page 16 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
1-16 HD Series Fishfinders
Chartplotter Functions
The Chartplotter includes the following functions:
• Display C-MAP NT and NT+ C-Card chart information including Ports and Tides (if available)
• View chart information (if available) for the Nearest Port
• Place, Move, Erase and Edit a Waypoint
• Goto Waypoint or Cursor
• Create, Save, Name, Edit and Follow a Route
• Review Route and Waypoint Lists
• Display vessel’s track; Save and Name the Track for re-call to screen
• Measure Chart Distances and Bearings on-screen
• Set Up Alarms and Timers
• Man OverBoard (MOB) to navigate back to a missing person or object
• Differential GPS set up page
Operation of these functions is described in Chapter 7 and Chapter 8.
81213_1.book Page 1 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation 2-1
Chapter 2: Installation
2.1 Introduction
This chapter provides installation instructions for the HD Series Fishfinders.
Systems such as that in Figure 2-1 are explained (see Section 2.9).
Details for mounting the LCD Display and connecting the equipment are included.
Digital Sounder Module PLUS Display Unit
GPS
Transducer
SeaTalk
Distribution Panel
Junction
Box hsb 2
Compass
12/24V Supply
NMEA 12/24V Supply
12V Supply 12V Supply
Figure 2-1: Fishfinder and Digital Sounder in an Integrated System
Note: If you wish to practice using the units before installation, connect the
HSB cable from the sounder module to the display and use the simulator mode, as described in Section 3.4 Simulator Mode.
If you are connecting your display to other equipment (including an hsb 2 Plus
Series display unit) install then test the fishfinder display and transducer as described in this chapter. Once the display is operating correctly, you can connect it to other equipment as described in Section 2.9Integrated Systems on page 2-24, taking particular care to ensure the correct polarity of the
SeaTalk supply.
Section 2.9
describes the hsb 2 , SeaTalk, and NMEA interfaces.
For the system to display depth, water temperature and speed, you must install the transducer type(s) capable of transmitting the appropriate data.
For full functionality of the radar and chartplotter you need to provide position and heading data.
• Heading data enables the chart to operate in North Up and Course Up modes. If speed data is also available the MOB function operates.
• Position data is required for full functionality of the chart display.
Full details of heading, position and other data are given in Section 2.9.
81213_1.book Page 2 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-2 HD Series Fishfinders
Planning the Installation
Before you install your system, plan the installation, considering:
• Correct transducer for your application. See document number 81196,
Transducers for Fishfinders Owner’s Handbook .
• Location of the display and sounder units, as described in Section 2.3
• Cable Runs, including cables for an integrated system (to provide heading and position data, etc.), as described in Section 2.4
.
EMC Installation Guidelines
All Raymarine equipment and accessories are designed to the best industry standards for use in the recreational marine environment.
Their design and manufacture conforms to the appropriate Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) standards, but correct installation is required to ensure that performance is not compromised. Although every effort has been taken to ensure that they will perform under all conditions, it is important to understand what factors could affect the operation of the product.
The guidelines given here describe the conditions for optimum EMC performance, but it is recognized that it may not be possible to meet all of these conditions in all situations. To ensure the best possible conditions for EMC performance within the constraints imposed by any location, always ensure the maximum separation possible between different items of electrical equipment.
For optimum EMC performance, it is recommended that wherever possible :
• Raymarine equipment and cables connected to it are:
• At least 3 ft (1 m) from any equipment transmitting or cables carrying radio signals (for example: VHF radios, cables, and antennas). In the case of SSB radios, the distance should be increased to 7 ft (2 m).
• More than 7 ft (2 m) from the path of a radar beam. A radar beam can normally be assumed to spread 20 degrees above and below the radiating element.
• The equipment is supplied from a separate battery from that used for engine start. Voltage drops below 10 V and starter motor transients can cause the equipment to reset. This will not damage the equipment, but may cause the loss of some information and may change the operating mode.
• Raymarine specified cables are used. Cutting and rejoining these cables can compromise EMC performance and must be avoided unless doing so is detailed in the installation manual.
81213_1.book Page 3 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation 2-3
• If a suppression ferrite is attached to a cable, this ferrite should not be removed. If the ferrite needs to be removed during installation it must be reassembled in the same position.
Suppression Ferrites
The following illustration shows typical cable suppression ferrites used with
Raymarine equipment. Always use the ferrites supplied by Raymarine.
D3548-3
Figure 2-2: Typical Suppression Ferrites
Connections to Other Equipment
If your Raymarine equipment is to be connected to other equipment using a cable not supplied by Raymarine, a suppression ferrite must always be attached to the cable that is closest to the Raymarine unit.
81213_1.book Page 4 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-4 HD Series Fishfinders
2.2 Unpacking and Inspecting the Components
Unpack your system carefully, to prevent damage to the equipment. Save the carton and packing, in case you need to return a unit for service.
Check that you have all the correct system components. These depend on your system package, as follows:
Table 2-1: Parts and Accessories
Item
7” Color LCD Fishfinder
7” Color LCD Fishfinder/Chartplotter
10.4” Color LCD Fishfinder
10.4” Color LCD Fishfinder/Chartplotter
DSM250 Digital Sounder Module
7” LCD Display Sun cover
10.4” LCD Display Sun cover
Handbook, Fishfinder/Chart
Handbook, Transducers
Quick Reference Card, Fishfinder
Quick Reference Card, Chart
Mounting bracket knobs (x2)
7” Display Mounting bracket assy
10.4” Display Mounting bracket assy
7” Display Flush Mount Kit
10.4” DIsplay Flush Mount Kit
Mounting Screws, DSM250, #8 (x4)
Power cable - display unit
- sounder module
SeaTalk cable assembly -
Flat molded plugs both ends:
3 ft 3 in (1 m) long
9 ft 9 in (3 m) long
16 ft 3 in (5 m) long
29 ft 3 in (9 m)) long
Flat to male round connector:
12 in (0.3 m) long
Flat to female round connector:
12 in (0.3 m) long
Flat molded plug one end only:
3 ft 3 in (1 m) long
SeaTalk auxiliary junction box
Part No.
Supplied with:
E63042
E63037
E63040
E63041
E62007
L770D Plus
L770DRC Plus
L1260D Plus
L1260DRC Plus
L770D, L770DRC
L1260D, L1260DRC
L770D, L770DRC
L1260D, L1260DRC
D331
E55031
81213
81196
86066
86067
All
All
All
L770DRC, L1260DRC
W145
W143
E55032
M92708
E55033
N/A
W144
R69053
All
L770D, L770DRC
L1260D, L1260DRC
—
—
All
All
All
D284
D285
D286
D287
D187
D188
D229
R55006
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
L770DRC, L1260DRC
All
All
All
All
Option for:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
L770D, L770DRC
L1260D, L1260DRC
—
—
—
All
All
All
L770D, L1260D
81213_1.book Page 5 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation
Table 2-1: Parts and Accessories
Part No.
Supplied with: Item hsb 2 cable assy
3 ft 3 in (1 m)
10 ft (3 m)
20 ft (6 m)
30 ft (10 m)
60 ft (20m) hsb 2 In Line Terminator hsb 2 Splitter Cable
NMEA OUT cable assy
4 ft 11 in (1.5m)
Transducer and Cables (See 81196
Transducers for Fishfinders Handbook )
R55001
R55002
R55003
R55004
E55010
R58117
E55040
R55005
—
—
All
—
—
—
All
—
All
—
Option for:
All
—
All
All
All
—
All
—
—
2-5
81213_1.book Page 6 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-6 HD Series Fishfinders
2.3 Selecting the Equipment Location
Display Unit Mounting Location
The display unit can be mounted using the mounting bracket supplied or console mounted using the optional flush-mounting kit. The dimensions of the display units, including the bracket, are shown below in Figure 2-3 and
Figure 2-4 .
When planning the installation, the following should be considered to ensure reliable and trouble free operation:
• Convenience: The contrast and colors seen on all LCD displays vary slightly with viewing angle; this is more noticeable on the left hand side.
Power the unit and select a suitable mounting location prior to installing the display. The mounting location should be easily accessible to allow operation of the front panel controls.
• Access: There must be sufficient space behind the display to allow cable connections to the rear panel connectors, avoiding tight bends in the cable.
• Interference: The selected location should be far enough away from devices that may cause interference, such as motors, generators and radio transmitter/receivers (see the EMC guidelines earlier in this section).
• Magnetic compass: Mount the display unit at least 3 ft (1m) away from a magnetic compass.
• Cable runs: The display unit must be located near a DC power source. The power cable supplied is 4.9 ft (1.5m), but a longer cable can be used if desired. Refer to Section 2.4
.
The maximum length of cable between a display and the transducer unit should not normally exceed 30 ft (10 m). If you need to use a longer cable, refer to Section 2.4.
• Environment: Do not restrict airflow at the rear of the display unit.
The display incorporates Cold Cathode Florescent Lamps (CCFL), which have a reduced light output when the unit is very hot. Ventilation is required to prevent the unit from overheating.
The display should be protected from physical damage and excessive vibration. Mount the display in a protected area away from prolonged and direct exposure to rain and salt spray.
81213_1.book Page 7 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation
10.51 in (267 mm)
0.95 in
(24.3 mm) 6.89 in (175 mm)
2-7
8.8 in (223.6 mm)
GAIN
VRM/EBL
DISPLAY
MARKS
MULTI
ALARMS RANGE
POWER ENTER CLEAR MENU
1.42 in (36 mm) 4.53 in (115 mm)
6.9 in (176 mm) cable cleareance
3.15 in
(80 mm)
6.3 in (160 mm)
8.85 in (225 mm)
1.28 in (32.5 mm)
Weight: 8.1 lbs (3.7 Kg)
Compass Safe Distance: 39 in (1 m)
D4847-4
Figure 2-3: 7” Color LCD Fishfinder Display Unit Dimensions
(L770D Plus and L770DRC Plus)
81213_1.book Page 8 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-8
11.5 in (292 mm)
HD Series Fishfinders
3.82 in (97 mm)
6.38 in (162 mm) cable clearance
12.9 in (328 mm)
9.7 in (246 mm) 0.87 in (22.1 mm)
7.88 in (200 mm)
11.26 in (286 mm)
1.7 in (43 mm) Compass Safe Distance: 39 in (1 m)
Figure 2-4: 10.4” Color LCD Fishfinder Display Dimensions
(L1260D and L1260DRC Plus)
D5066-3
81213_1.book Page 9 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation 2-9
Sounder Module Mounting Location
The DSM250 is waterproof to CFR46 is and designed to be mounted either above or below deck. The unit should be protected from physical damage and excessive vibration.
WARNING:
Mount the DSM250 in a protected area away from prolonged exposure to rain, salt spray, and direct sunlight, but well ventilated. Locate the sounder as close to the transducer as possible. Raymarine suggests not locating the DSM250 on the main console.
CAUTION:
Do not mount the DSM250 in the engine compartment.
When planning the installation, the following should be considered to ensure reliable and trouble free operation:
• Access: There must be sufficient space below the unit to enable cable connections to the panel connectors, avoiding tight bends in the cable.
• Interference: The selected location should be far enough away from devices that may cause interference, such as motors, generators, and radio transmitter/receivers (see the EMC guidelines earlier in this section).
• Magnetic compass: Mount the unit at least 3 ft (1m) away from a magnetic compass.
• Cable runs: The unit must be located near a DC power source. The power cable supplied is 10 ft (3 m), but a longer cable can be used if desired. Refer to Section 2.4
.
The maximum length of cable between the sounder module and the transducer unit should not normally exceed 30 ft (10 m). If you need to use a longer cable, refer to Section 2.4.
• Environment: Good ventilation is required to prevent the unit from overheating.
CAUTION:
Removal of the transducer cable from the DSM250 while power is turned on can cause sparks. As with any electronic device, be sure the sounder module is mounted where it is well ventilated and free from gasoline fumes.
81213_1.book Page 10 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-10 HD Series Fishfinders
9.96 in (252.9 mm)
Weight: 2.2 lbs (1.0 Kg)
Compass Safe Distance: 39 in (1 m)
D6168-1
9.51 in (241.6 mm)
10.76 in (273.3 mm)
Figure 2-5: DSM250 Unit Dimensions
7.37 in (187.2 mm)
2.4 Cable Runs
Consider the following before installing the system cables:
• You will need to attach the power cable and the transducer cable. Additional cables will be required if you are installing an integrated system.
• All cables should be adequately secured, protected from physical damage and protected from exposure to heat. Avoid running cables through bilges or doorways, or close to moving or hot objects.
• Sharp bends must be avoided
• Where a cable passes through an exposed bulkhead or deckhead, a watertight feed-through should be used.
• Secure cables in place using tie-wraps or lacing twine. Coil any extra cable and tie it out of the way.
You need to run the following cables:
• Power/NMEA Input cable , supplied with the display unit. This 5 ft (1.5 m) power cable is supplied for connecting the ship’s DC power to the display unit. This has a connector plug at one end for connecting the display unit, and 7 wires at the other end for connecting the power supply and optional NMEA inputs (see Integrated Systems on page 2-24). The power cable may be extended by up to 60 ft (20 m) using a wire gauge of AWG 12
(3.5 mm
2
) or greater.
81213_1.book Page 11 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation 2-11
• Sounder Power cable , supplied with the DSM250. This 10 ft (3 m) cable has a connector plug at one end for connecting to the sounder module, and
3 wires at the other end for connecting the power supply.
• HSB cable , supplied with the unit. This 10 ft (3m) cable is used to connect the DSM250 to the display unit. Other lengths of HSB cables are available from Raymarine. See Table 2-1 Parts and Accessories on page 2-4.
• SeaTalk cable , optional, with SeaTalk connector(s) at one or both ends.
• NMEA Output cable , optional, with an NMEA OUT connector at one end only.
• Transducer cable , supplied with the transducer. This 30 ft (10 m) cable has a connector plug (with an outer nut that you must attach) at one end for the sounder module or extension cable. The transducer cable may be extended up to a maximum of 60 ft (20 m) using optional extension cables.
For details, see document number 81196, Transducers for Fishfinders
Owner’s Handbook.
Note: The transducer cable connector has a nut that has been removed to aid installation. There is no need to cut the transducer cable for installation.
WARNING:
Do not cut the transducer cable or remove the connector.
Do not try to shorten or splice the cable.
Cutting the transducer cable will severely reduce sonar performance.
If the cable is cut, it must be replaced—it cannot be repaired.
CUTTING THE CABLE WILL ALSO VOID THE WARRANTY.
81213_1.book Page 12 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-12 HD Series Fishfinders
2.5 Mounting the Display Unit
The HD Series LCD display unit is waterproof to CFR46 and can be installed either above or below deck. The display unit can be mounted using the mounting bracket supplied or console mounted using the optional flushmounting kit (see Section 2.2
).
Mounting Bracket
The display unit can be mounted on a dash, chart table, bulkhead, or deckhead.
D4848-1
Figure 2-6: LCD Display Mounting
1. Loosen the knobs and remove the mounting bracket from the display unit.
2. Mark the locations of the mounting bracket screw holes on the mounting surface.
3. Use the screws supplied to attach the mounting bracket at the marked locations.
4. Attach the display unit to the mounting bracket, adjust the display angle, and tighten the knobs.
Console Mounting
The display unit can be console mounted if desired, using the optional flushmounting kit (Raymarine part number M92708 for 7 ” Fishfinder displays and
E55033 for 10.4
” Fishfinder displays).
81213_1.book Page 13 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation 2-13
CAUTION:
Make sure there are no hidden electrical wires or other items behind the location before proceeding. Make sure there is sufficient rear access for mounting and cabling.
1. Check the selected location for the unit. A clear, flat area at least 9 in (230 mm) wide by 8¼ in (210 mm) high, with at least 6.9 in (176 mm) of clearance behind the panel, is required.
2. Unpack the flush-mounting kit.
3. Using the supplied template, trace out the display unit opening.
4. Drill a ½ in (12.7 mm) pilot hole in each corner of the cut-out area.
5. Using a suitable saw, cut along the inside edge of the cut-out line.
6. Remove the mounting bracket knobs and bracket from the display unit.
Make sure that the unit fits in the cut-out area.
If the optional screw fitting is required, drill four 3/16 in (5 mm) holes as indicated on the template.
Screw the studs into the holes provided at the rear of the display.
7. Connect the DC power cable, HSB cable, transducer cable, and any other accessory cables to the display. Avoid tight bends in the cables.
8. Place the gasket on the unit and slide the unit into the panel cut-out.
9. Use the flush-mounting kit to secure the unit to the console.
Alternatively, place a spacer over each of the four studs and secure with the thumb nuts.
2.6 Mounting the Sounder Module
The DSM250 can be installed either above or below deck using the supplied hardware.
CAUTION:
Do not mount the DSM250 in the engine compartment.
To allow for proper water drainage and ease of cable connection, the DMS250 should be mounted vertically, so that the cables can hang below the unit, as in
Figure 2-7 .
A mounting template is provided at the end of this handbook.
➤
To mount the DSM250:
1. Attach the template (or hold the module itself) in the location where you want to mount the unit, making sure it is perpendicular to the floor.
2. If not using the template, use a pencil to mark the location of the four key holes onto the mounting surface.
81213_1.book Page 14 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-14 HD Series Fishfinders
3. Drill a 9/64" pilot hole at each of the four key holes or marked locations.
4. For fiberglass with a gelcoat surface, you should overdrill the surface to prevent the gelcoat from chipping when driving in the screw. Before drilling the pilot hole, hand drill the marked location with an oversized bit and countersink to approximately
3/8" diameter.
5. Drive the supplied #8 screws into the pilot holes. Screw them in about half way.
6. Mount the module to the surface, slipping the screw heads through the four key holes.
7. Press the module downward so the screws align with the narrow end of the keyholes.
8. Tighten the screws. Do not overtighten.
Figure 2-7: Mounting the DSM250
81213_1.book Page 15 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation 2-15
2.7 Display Unit Connections
The rear of the HD Series LCD display provides the following connection sockets:
• HSB, in/out connector for connecting to the DSM250 and additional hsb 2
Plus Series displays (such as a chartplotter, radar, or second fishfinder display).
• NMEA Output, for NMEA data output in an integrated system.
• Power/NMEA Input , for 12 V, 24 V or 32 V DC power connection, two
NMEA 0183 inputs and one RF ground (screen) connection.
• Transducer connection, not used.
• SeaTalk , for SeaTalk data input and output and connecting to additional
Plus Series displays (such as a chartplotter, radar, or second fishfinder display).
Note: The ‘Transducer’ connector is not used with the HD Series Fishfinders.
The transducer is connected to the DSM250 sounder module.
D6264-1
Figure 2-8: HD Series Fishfinder Display Connector Panel
The following sections detail the display unit connectors used when installing the LCD Display. The remaining connector details are provided in
Section 2.9
.
DC Power and NMEA Connection
The HD Series Fishfinder is intended for use on ships’ DC power systems rated from 10.7 V to 32 V.
The power connection to the display should be made at either the output of the battery isolator switch or at a DC power distribution panel.
Raymarine recommends that power is fed directly to the display via its own dedicated cable system and MUST be protected by a thermal circuit breaker or fuse, installed close to the power connection.
Use a 6 amp fuse for 12V systems or 4 amp fuse for 24/32V systems.
81213_1.book Page 16 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-16 HD Series Fishfinders
Grounding
It is important that an effective RF ground is connected to the system. A single ground point should be used for all equipment. You may ground the display by connecting the drain wire (shield) of the Power/NMEA Input cable to the ship’s RF ground. If your vessel does not have an RF system, connect the drain wire to the negative battery terminal. If you need to extend the wire, the extension wire should be an 8 mm braid or AWG 10 multi-stranded cable.
The DC system should be either:
• Negative grounded, with the negative battery terminal connected to the ships ground.
• Floating, with neither battery terminal connected to the ships ground.
CAUTION:
This system is not intended for use on “positive” ground vessels.
The power cable Ground (earth) connections must be connected to the ship’s ground as described above.
For details on using NMEA, see SeaTalk and NMEA In on page 2-27.
Power and NMEA Input Connector
The DC power and NMEA input should be connected at the rear Power/
NMEA seven-pin connector. The connector (viewed from the outside) and pin functions are shown in the following diagram and table. The NMEA Input is detailed in Section 2.9
.
f
2 5
1
4
3
Figure 2-9: Power and NMEA Connector
7
6
D3231-2
81213_1.book Page 17 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation 2-17
4
5
2
3
6
7
Pin No.
Function
1 Channel 1 NMEA data input (+ve)
Channel 1 NMEA return (-ve)
Battery negative
Shield (drain wire)
Battery positive (12/24/32 V systems)
Channel 2 NMEA data input (+ve)
Channel 2 NMEA return (-ve)
Color
Orange
Yellow
Black
No insulation
Red
Green
Blue
WARNING:
If the power connections are accidentally reversed the system will not work. Use a multimeter to ensure that the input power leads are connected for correct polarity.
Switch off the display unit before you remove the power cord.
The RED wire must be connected to the feed from the positive (+) battery terminal and the BLACK wire to the feed from the negative (–) battery terminal. The shielded wire (screen) should be connected to the ship’s RF ground as previously described in Ground Connection on page 2-20. Any unused wires should be insulated and taped back.
Power for External Equipment
External equipment cannot be powered from the display’s SeaTalk interface.
It must be powered from the ship’s supply or via a SeaTalk bus.
Refer to Section 2.9 for further details.
Transducer Connection
The transducer is connected to the DSM250, so this connector is left empty on the display unit.
81213_1.book Page 18 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-18 HD Series Fishfinders
HSB (
hsb 2
) Connection
An HSB cable is required to connect the sounder module to the display unit for showing echo sounder data. A 3m (10 ft) HSB cable is supplied with the
DSM250. These cables are also available in lengths of 1, 6, 10, and 20 m. See
Table 2-1 Parts and Accessories on page 2-4 for the complete list and associated part numbers.
The HSB cable is attached to the three-pin male connector marked HSB on the connector panel of the sounder module and display unit. The connector pins are shown in the following diagram. This information is provided as an aid to fault diagnosis.
For details on using hsb 2 , see High Speed Bus (hsb2) on page 2-25.
HSB connector
Pin 1
Pin 3
HSB connector
Pin Pin name Function
1 CGND Screen
2 HSB_POS HSB
3 HSB_NEG HSB
Pin 2
Rear of Display Unit 1
3
HSB
2
Figure 2-10: HSB Connector
D4253-4
81213_1.book Page 19 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation 2-19
2.8 DSM250 Connections
The DSM250’s connector panel contains the following sockets:
• Transducer connection.
• Ground connection.
• Power , for 12 V, 24 V, or 32 V DC power connection and one RF ground
(screen) connection.
• HSB, in/out connector for connecting to the HD Series display.
D6161-1
Figure 2-11: DSM250 Connector Panel
The following sections detail the connectors used when installing the
DSM250.
DC Power Connection
The DSM250 is intended for use on ships’ DC power systems rated from 10.7
V to 32 V.
The power connection to the unit should be made at either the output of the battery isolator switch or at a DC power distribution panel. Raymarine recommends that power is fed directly to the DSM250 via its own dedicated cable system and MUST be protected by a thermal circuit breaker or 8A fuse on the red (positive) wire, installed close to the power connection.
A 10 ft (3 m) power cable is supplied for connecting the ship’s DC power to the unit. The power cable may be extended by up to 60 ft (20 m) using a wire gauge of AWG 12 or greater.
DC power is connected at the three-pin POWER connector on the unit’s connector panel. The connector (viewed from the outside) and pin functions are shown in the following diagram and table.
81213_1.book Page 20 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-20
f
1
HD Series Fishfinders
2
3
D6162-1
Figure 2-12: Power Connector
Pin No.
Function
1
Color
Battery positive (12/24/32 V systems) Red
2
3
Battery negative
Shield (drain wire)
Black
No insulation
The RED wire must be connected to the feed from the positive (+) battery terminal and the BLACK wire to the feed from the negative (–) battery terminal. The shield wire (drain) should be connected to the ship’s RF ground as described in Ground Connection on page 2-20.
Install a quick blow 8 amp fuse on the red (positive) wire.
WARNING:
If the power connections are accidentally reversed the system will not work. Use a multimeter to ensure that the input power leads are connected for correct polarity.
There is no power switch on the DSM250. The unit turns on when the power cord is attached to ship’s power and plugged into the POWER connector on the connector panel.
Note: You should locate the DSM250 so that the power cord can be easily removed, if necessary. If the sounder is placed in a difficult-to-reach location,
Raymarine strongly suggests installing an on/off switch on the DSM250 power cord at a point where it is easily accessible.
Ground Connection
As with the display unit, it is important that an effective RF ground is connected to the system. A single ground point should be used for all equipment. You may ground the DSM250 by connecting the drain wire
(shield) of the Power Input cable to the ship’s RF ground. If you need to extend the wire, the extension wire should be an 8 mm braid or AWG 10 multistranded cable.
81213_1.book Page 21 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation 2-21
If your vessel has a dedicated ground strap available, you may alternatively attach it to the ground wing nut on the rear panel of the module.
If your vessel does not have an RF system, connect the drain wire to the negative battery terminal.
The DC system should be either:
• Negative grounded, with the negative battery terminal connected to the ship’s ground.
• Floating, with neither battery terminal connected to the ship’s ground.
WARNING:
This system is not intended for use on “positive” ground vessels.
The power cable Ground (earth) connections must be connected to the ship’s ground as described above.
Transducer Connection
A 30 ft (10m) cable is supplied with the transducer. The transducer cable may be extended up to a maximum of 60 ft (20 m) using optional extension cables.
For details, see document number 81196, Transducers for Fishfinders
Owner’s Handbook.
The transducer cable connector (and Y-shaped connector, if supplied) has a nut that has been removed to aid installation. To enable you to complete the installation without cutting the cable, ensure that any holes you drill are large enough to accept the connector, with the nut removed (approximately 13/16" or 21 mm).
WARNING:
Take care not to pull on the cable. This can damage the transducer wires.
Before attaching the transducer cable, you will need to attach the connector nut and split ring. These items, plus a wedge tool, are included in the transducer packaging.
The transducer cable is attached to the 7 pin male connector marked
TRANSDUCER on the connector panel of the DSM250. How you connect the cable depends on the type of transducer you have installed:
• Combined depth/speed/temp transducers (‘triducers’) have a 7 pin female connector. Attach the transducer cable connector directly to the display unit.
• Combined speed/temperature transducers have a 3 pin female connector that requires the use of an additional Y-shaped cable (Raymarine part number E66022) to attach to the 7 pin connector on the display. This Y-cable is included with your speed/temperature transducer.
81213_1.book Page 22 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-22 HD Series Fishfinders
Attach the 7 pin female connector on the Y-cable to the sounder module, and then attach the transducer cable to the 3 pin male connector on the Ycable.
• Depth-only transducers have a 7 pin female connector.
Attach the transducer cable connector directly to the sounder module.
• If being installed in conjunction with a speed/temperature transducer, attach the Y-cable’s 7 pin female connector to the sounder module, and then attach the transducer cable to the 7 pin male connector on the Y-cable.
Note: If your system requires both a Y-cable and a transducer extension cable, ensure that you connect the Y-cable to the sounder module and the extension cable to the transducer.
The connector pins are shown in the following diagram, together with the connections and wire colors. This information is provided as an aid to fault diagnosis.
WARNING:
Do not cut the transducer cable or remove the connector.
Do not try to shorten or splice the cable.
Cutting the transducer cable will severely reduce sonar performance.
If the cable is cut, it must be replaced—it cannot be repaired.
Cutting the cable will also void the warranty.
5
2
1
3
4
1
2
Pin
No.
4
3
Figure 2-13: DSM250 Transducer Connector
Function Function Color Pin
No.
Speed
Temp
Red
White
5
6
Shield
Sense
Drain 7
Green
D4850-2
Color
Speed/Temp Ground Brown
Depth + Blue
Depth – Black
6
7
81213_1.book Page 23 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation 2-23
CAUTION:
Removing the transducer cable from the rear of the DSM250 while the sounder module is powered on can cause sparks. Only remove the transducer cable after power has been removed from the DSM250.
If the transducer cable is accidentally removed while the DSM250 is powered on, remove power from the sounder module, replace the transducer cable, and then return power to the module. As a safety feature, the DSM250 only recognizes that the transducer is connected at power-up.
Figure 2-14: Properly Mounted Sounder Module
EMC Conformance
Always check the installation before going to sea to make sure that it is not affected by radio transmissions, engine starting, etc.
81213_1.book Page 24 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-24 HD Series Fishfinders
2.9 Integrated Systems
hsb 2 Plus and HD Series displays can be linked to other equipment to transfer data as follows:
• A second display, either CRT or LCD, can be connected via hsb 2 (and
SeaTalk) to repeat fishfinder, chart and/or radar information at a remote location.
Note: If you have an integrated system with a Pathfinder Plus radar master display that includes MARPA as a primary function, MARPA functionality is available on the LCD repeater display.
• Data can be received via SeaTalk or NMEA, some of which will increase the functionality of the display. Other data can be viewed on the display.
• Data can be transmitted via SeaTalk and NMEA to enhance other equipment.
• Some incoming data can be converted across the communication link and re-transmitted.
Power for External Equipment
External equipment cannot be powered from the display’s SeaTalk interface.
It must be powered from the ship’s supply or via a SeaTalk bus.
Ensure correct polarity of the SeaTalk connection.
For systems where the ship’s power source is 24 V only, you may need to install a 24 V to 12 V DC converter. This is only necessary if the products being connected to the display are:
• SeaTalk compatible (for example: compass, GPS, and instruments) and there is no existing SeaTalk bus
• NMEA compatible, but operate only from 12 V (for example: compass,
GPS, and some navigators)
The DC-DC converter must conform to the following specification:
Table 2-2: DC-DC Converter for External Equipment
Input 21 to 32 V DC
Output 13.6 V DC, isolated
Load Continuous current rating, in excess of required load
81213_1.book Page 25 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation 2-25
High Speed Bus (
hsb 2
)
The High Speed Bus ( hsb 2 ) provides extremely rapid transfer of data between master and repeater displays. With an hsb 2 and a SeaTalk connection, most data available can be controlled and displayed by any unit.
Master functionality is provided by the display with the appropriate transducer/scanner connected as defined in Table 2-3 . You can have a master fishfinder and a master radar in the same system. Data on master units are displayed on all connected repeater units.
Note: For the DSM250 to operate properly, the display unit must be set up as the Repeater unit in the Sonar Setup menu. See Section 4.4.
The
hsb 2
Network
Up to ten hsb 2 Plus Series units can be combined to create a variety of functionalities. For example, you can connect your L770D/RC Plus or
L1250D/RC Plus Fishfinder to the DSM250 and then to a remote hsb 2 Series
Pathfinder Plus Radar and a remote hsb 2 Series Plus Chartplotter to provide fishfinder, chart, and radar functionality on all three displays. You can display some combinations, such as fishfinder/chart or radar/chart, in half-screen windows.
Note: Fishfinder STC cannot be adjusted on a repeater (non-HD Series) display, nor can depth offset, speed and temperature calibration be set. Frequency can be selected on either master or repeater, but the same frequency is used on all displays.
The hsb 2 system can include several chartplotter displays, each with two chart cartridge slots. Each display can access two local and up to six remote chart cartridges. Charts can be controlled independently on each display, even when a remote chart cartridge is being used.
Table 2-3: hsb 2
Network Master Displays
Master Function Unit Type
Radar R70, RL70, RL70C, RL70RC, RL70CRC,
R80, RL80, RL80C, RL80RC, RL80CRC
Chart
Fishfinder
RC520, RC530, RC631
RL70RC, RL70CRC, RL80RC, RL80CRC,
L755RC, L760RC, L770DRC, L1250RC,
L1260DRC
DSM250, L755RC, L760, L760RC,
L770D, L770DRC, L1250, L1250RC,
L1260D, L1260DRC
Transducer/Scanner
Any Pathfinder Series
Scanner
Display includes a two-slot chart cartridge
Fishfinder transducer
81213_1.book Page 26 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-26 HD Series Fishfinders
DSM250 Digital Sounder
Note: Earlier HSB (non-Plus) Display units with can be upgraded to provide hsb 2 Plus compatibility. Please contact your authorized Raymarine dealer for details.
L1260D PLUS Fishfinder RL80C PLUS Radar
RC530 PLUS Chartplotter
D6220-1 hsb
2
Inline
Terminator hsb 2
Splitter hsb 2
Splitter hsb 2
Inline
Terminator
Power
HSB cable HSB cable HSB cable
Power Power Power
Figure 2-15: Fishfinder Integrated System with Multiple hsb 2 Plus Connections
Upgrading Existing HSB Series Displays
Earlier HSB (non-PLUS) display units can be upgraded to provide hsb 2 Plus compatibility. Two types of upgrades are available:
1. A full hardware and software upgrade (Plus upgrade) provides full compatibility with the hsb 2 system.
This configuration supports up to eight true Plus (or Plus upgraded) displays with a cable limit of 60 meters. Nine to ten true Plus (or Plus upgraded) displays can be connected at a maximum of 40 meters cable length.
2. A software-only upgrade enables the display to be used with a Plus (or Plus upgraded) unit in the hsb 2 system.
However, like the old HSB (non-Plus) system, this configuration only supports two displays: two software-only upgraded units or one software-only upgraded with one true Plus (or Plus upgraded) display.
Connecting
hsb 2
Plus Series Units
Figure 2-15 illustrates how to inter-connect various hsb 2 Plus Series Displays.
When connecting your hsb 2 Plus Series displays, there are several important points to keep in mind:
81213_1.book Page 27 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation 2-27
1. If more than two hsb 2 Plus Series displays are to be connected, you must use an hsb 2 Splitter Cable, Raymarine part number E55040.
2.
hsb 2 displays at the end of the chain must be terminated using the Inline
Terminator plug (Raymarine part number R58117) included with your hsb 2
Plus Series display unit.
3. The total cable length for an hsb 2 network containing the maximum 10 display units (both Plus and Plus upgrades) must not exceed 40 meters. A network comprised of only 8 displays can extend up to 60 meters.
4. Earlier HSB (non-Plus) Display units can be enhanced with a hardware and software upgrade to provide full hsb 2 Plus functionality.
5. Earlier non-Plus displays can also be outfitted with a software-only upgrade, which enables hsb 2 compatibility. However, these software-only upgraded displays are not true Plus units. They must not use the Inline Terminator plug because they are already terminated internally.
Like the old HSB system, this configuration only supports two displays: two software-only upgraded units or one software-only upgraded with one true Plus (or Plus upgraded) display.
An In/Out connector cable is provided for connecting to another hsb 2 Plus
Series display.
Note: The HSB cables have ferrite clamps attached at each end to ensure
EMC conformance. The cables are available in lengths of 1, 3, 6, 10 and 20 m.
SeaTalk and NMEA In
The display unit can receive a comprehensive range of data. The primary data is described below:
Table 2-4: Function of SeaTalk and NMEA Data
Data
Heading
Position
Primary Uses
Chart: modes/ vectors
Chart: own vessel position
MOB (also requires speed and HDG data)
Suggested Source
Compass connected to SeaTalk bus,
NMEA Compass
SeaTalk GPS connected via Auxiliary JB
Existing GPS Navigator via SeaTalk bus
Existing GPS (or Loran-C) navigator with
NMEA output
Waypoint Chart: Waypoint and route transfer Existing GPS Navigator via SeaTalk bus
Existing GPS (or Loran-C) navigator with
NMEA output
Heading data should ideally contain both magnetic and true heading. If only one is available then a source of magnetic variation should be connected.
81213_1.book Page 28 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-28 HD Series Fishfinders
Radars and chartplotters can exchange their cursors via SeaTalk. Locked heading should be used for Course Up if available via SeaTalk. Other data connected via a SeaTalk bus or via NMEA is generally displayed in data boxes
(for example: depth, apparent wind angle and speed, time).
Note: The Fishfinder uses its own depth data, rather than any other depth data on SeaTalk. If there is no other depth data on SeaTalk, Fishfinder depth is transmitted. If speed and temperature data are available on SeaTalk the Fishfinder uses this data; if this data is not on SeaTalk from other instruments, it is transmitted by the Fishfinder.
For details of received data refer to the table in Appendix D: SeaTalk and
NMEA Data . Examples of SeaTalk and NMEA systems are shown in
Figure 2-16 and Figure 2-17 .
GPS
Scanner
SeaTalk
PLUS Fishfinder DSM250 Digital Sounder PLUS Radar
SeaTalk hsb 2
SeaTalk
SeaTalk hsb 2
12/24V Supply
Course Computer
SeaTalk hsb 2
12/24V Supply
12/24V Supply
Distribution Panel
SeaTalk
12/24V
Supply
12/24V
Supply
Transducer
SeaTalk
12/24V Supply
SeaTalk
D6219-2
12/24V Supply
Figure 2-16: I ntegrated System with Repeater Display and SeaTalk Instruments
81213_1.book Page 29 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation
DSM250 Digital Sounder PLUS Fishfinder Display PLUS Repeater Display
2-29
Transducer
Compass hsb
2
12/24V Supply
GPS hsb 2
SeaTalk
NMEA Out
Distribution
Panel
Non SeaTalk
Pilot
12/24V Supply NMEA
NMEA
12V Supply
D6218-2
Figure 2-17: Integrated System with Repeater Display and NMEA Instruments
SeaTalk
The SeaTalk standard was originally developed by Autohelm (part of the
Raymarine group) and enables compatible instruments to be connected by a single cable carrying power and data in/out. This means that additional instruments and functions can be added to a SeaTalk system, simply by plugging them into the network.
SeaTalk is a precise, high-speed, bi-directional protocol which is flexible enough to adapt to any number of instruments, without a central processor.
SeaTalk equipment can also communicate with non-SeaTalk equipment via the NMEA standard.
SeaTalk Connection
SeaTalk data, if present, is the primary source for all navigational data except heading.
This connection is necessary for full functionality between HD Series and hsb 2
Plus Series displays.
The SeaTalk input/output should be connected at the rear SeaTalk 3-pin connector. This appears as follows, when viewed from outside:
81213_1.book Page 30 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-30 HD Series Fishfinders
SeaTalk In/Out
1. Red (No internal connection)
2. Screen (0V)
3. Yellow (Data)
D3232-4
1
2
3
Figure 2-18: SeaTalk Connector
Pin No.
Function Color
+12 V
0 V
Data
Red
Shield
Yellow
Note:
1. The display does not supply 12 V via the SeaTalk connector, nor does the
SeaTalk connector require 12 V to operate.
12 V is required for other SeaTalk units (except where SeaTalk is connected only between two hsb 2 displays).
2. If you are connecting an active compass to the fishfinder, the NMEA input has priority. You should, therefore, use an NMEA input channel (see Power and NMEA Input Connection) rather than the SeaTalk interface, unless the compass only has a SeaTalk output.
To connect the display unit to the SeaTalk bus, connect a standard SeaTalk cable between the SeaTalk connector on the rear of the display and a SeaTalk instrument or the SeaTalk bus.
Standard SeaTalk cables are available in a range of lengths (part numbers
D284 to D287). Cables for connecting to SeaTalk units with round connectors are also available (part numbers D187 or D188). See Section 2.2
for further details .
NMEA 0183
The NMEA 0183 Data Interface Standard was developed by the National
Marine Electronics Association of America. It is an international standard that enables equipment from many different manufacturers to be connected together and to share information.
The information is passed in “sentences”, each of which has a three-letter sentence identifier. When you check to see if one item will “talk” to another, make sure that the two items both use the same sentence identifiers.
81213_1.book Page 31 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation 2-31
For example: VTG carries Course and Speed Over Ground data; GLL carries latitude and longitude; DBT carries water depth; MWV carries relative wind angle and wind speed data.
The NMEA 0183 standard carries similar information to SeaTalk. However, it has the important difference that one cable will only carry information in one direction. For this reason NMEA 0183 is generally used to connect a data receiver and a transmitter together (for example: a compass sensor transmitting heading to a radar or a GPS sensor (or Chartplotter) transmitting position and navigation data to a radar.
NMEA Input Connection
The two NMEA/Power input connectors are normally used for non-SeaTalk
Compass (heading) data or GPS. It can also be used for additional navigation data (if not provided via SeaTalk).
Connect the input(s) to the orange and yellow wires (Channel 1) and/or the green and blue wires (Channel 2). Refer to Power and NMEA Input Connector on page 2-16 for further details.
For example, to connect a Raymarine Heading Sensor to the NMEA Channel
1 input, connect the cables and power supply using a suitable connector block, as shown in the diagram below. If installed, it may be convenient to connect the power to the SeaTalk auxiliary junction box described in the following section.
Red
Yellow
Black
+12 V
+ NMEA Data (orange)
-- NMEA Data (yellow)
0V
D3604-1
Figure 2-19: NMEA Input Connection
Using the SeaTalk Auxiliary Junction Box
A junction box is used to connect the SeaTalk system to the display unit. This junction box enables the SeaTalk bus, power and GPS to be connected.
If power is not already available (via another SeaTalk instrument), the junction box can be used to apply power to the SeaTalk bus for other applications. The junction box may also be used for other purposes.
81213_1.book Page 32 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-32 HD Series Fishfinders
For example: supplying power to a flux gate compass and routing the compass data to the display NMEA In connection, or alternatively for connecting a
NMEA GPS system.
The junction box includes:
• SeaTalk cable and connector to attach to display unit
• Power cable to connect to 12 V power (if required)
• Input connections to connect SeaTalk cable from external equipment
• Spare connections for another instrument
CAUTION:
Ensure correct polarity of the 12 V supply before applying SeaTalk power. Use a multimeter to check the connections.
Figure 2-20 shows how to connect the junction box; Appendix B provides connection details for specific Raymarine, Apelco, and Autohelm GPS and
Beacon Receiver systems.
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
To GPS
Power Out: 1 & 2
Power In: 1 & 3
12V
Power
Supply
Fused
Spare
Input
Cable
SeaTalk
Power
GPS
Core
Black (screen)
Red
Yellow
Black (screen)
Red
Black (screen)
Red
Yellow
1
2
1
2
3
Terminal
1
2
3
Function
0V
+12v
SeaTalk
0V
+12V
0V
+12V
SeaTalk
D4291-1
Figure 2-20: Using the Auxiliary Junction Box
Data Output
Data is transmitted in SeaTalk and NMEA formats as detailed in Appendix D and can be used to enhance other equipment as required.
The SeaTalk input/output connection is detailed in SeaTalk Connection on page 2-29.
81213_1.book Page 33 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 2: Installation 2-33
The NMEA output connector is a 4-pin connector as illustrated below. The
1.5 m NMEA OUT cable has a ferrite clamp attached to ensure EMC conformance.
NMEA OUT connector
Pin 2, white
Pin 5, screen
Pin 3, blue
Pin 4, not connected
NMEA OUT connector
Pin Pin name Function
2 NMEA_GND NMEA ground
3 NMEA_SIG NMEA data output
4 N/C N/C
5 CGND Screen
*Pin 1 does not exist on this connector
Rear of display
3 2
4 5
NMEA out
Figure 2-21: NMEA Output Connector
D4254-2
Data Conversion
The display units convert some information across the communications links as follows:
NMEA In to NMEA Out and SeaTalk
SeaTalk to NMEA Out
This enables data received by the display to be passed to other instruments. For example, if you have a master and a repeater display, you only need to connect
NMEA In to the master display, which will pass the data to the repeater via
SeaTalk.
You can prevent NMEA heading data being bridged onto the SeaTalk bus - refer to Bridge NMEA Heading on page 4-9.
Note: To transfer NMEA data, or to convert the data, the display must be powered On.
81213_1.book Page 34 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
2-34 HD Series Fishfinders
2.10 Integrated System Checks
Chart Display
When you have connected your display unit to the desired equipment ensure that position data is available at the display via NMEA or SeaTalk.
To confirm your chartplotter is operating correctly, perform the following checks:
1. Without a chart card installed, select the Chart display mode and select a suitable range scale. Verify that the world map is visible.
Use the trackpad to check cursor movement and normal scrolling action.
2. To ensure that the display is responding to position data:
Press FIND SHIP, check the cursor is fixed on the vessel symbol which is correctly positioned at the center of the chart display.
3. Insert a chart cartridge for the area of your vessel.
Use the RANGE key to zoom-in to check that the chart data is being displayed.
Received Data
If either SeaTalk or NMEA In is connected, verify that the expected data is displayed.
1. Press DISPLAY and select the NAV DATA WINDOW ON.
Check that the expected data is displayed.
2. If heading data is connected, select Chart mode and check it is displayed in the heading data box, or select Radar mode and check heading is displayed in the Status Bar.
Transmitted Data
If SeaTalk or NMEA Out is being transmitted to other equipment, check that the data is being received correctly.
An NMEA Out connector is used to transmit navigation data. The NMEA
Output cable should be connected to the upper, left connector on the rear of the display unit.
Note: The NMEA Output cable has a ferrite clamp attached to ensure EMC conformance.
81213_1.book Page 1 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 3: Getting Started 3-1
Chapter 3: Getting Started
3.1 Introduction
This chapter provides information to get you started using your HD Series
Fishfinder system. It will help you to become familiar with the basic functions of the display’s controls and learn how to operate the sonar system using
Simulator mode. More detailed information on operating the display unit is provided in Chapter 5 ; Sonar functions are described in Chapter 6 .
Note: All settings described in this chapter are retained when the unit is powered off. However, there is a one-minute delay from the time you make the setting change to when the DSM250 places it in memory. If you power down the sounder less than one minute after making a change, the setting is lost.
3.2 Switching the Units On and Off
Powering the Sounder Module
There is no power switch on the DSM250. The unit turns on when the power cord is attached to ship’s power and plugged into the POWER connector on the connector panel.
Note: The DSM250 should be located so that the power cord can be easily removed, if necessary. If the sounder is placed in a difficult-to-reach location,
Raymarine strongly suggests installing a power switch on the DSM250 power cord at a point where it is easily accessible.
Status LED
The LED on the connector panel blinks green when the module is powered on and operating normally. If the unit detects a problem, the LED blinks amber to indicate a warning or red for an error. The number of times the LED blinks is a code representing the nature of the problem. See Status LED on page 7-6 for more details.
Powering the Display Unit
The factory default power-up mode is full-screen Sonar mode. Once you have used the display unit it powers-up in the last used mode. The following sections describe the power-up sequence and how to select simulator mode.
➤
To switch the display on in Sonar mode:
Press and hold the POWER key until the unit beeps. The keys light up and after a few moments the display shows the fishfinder screen.
81213_1.book Page 2 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
3-2 HD Series Fishfinders
AUTO GCRZFH
50kHz
SD
0
20
40
FREQUENCY ZOOM ft
BTM.LOCK
60
A-SCOPE
Until unit beeps
Figure 3-1: Switching On in Sonar Mode
D5443-2
Setting the Display as a Sonar Repeater
Depth data is sourced from the device that has been designated as the Master sonar unit, which is the unit to which the transducer is connected. The
DSM250 is permanently set as the sonar master. For the sounder module to properly repeat its sonar image data to the display unit, the display must be designated as the sonar REPEATER .
MENU
SONAR
SET UP¬
This is not normally an issue because the display unit is set as the REPEATER by default. However, if you have changed this setting, you must return the display to be a REPEATER .
➤
To set the display unit to be the sonar repeater:
1. Press the MENU key.
The Menu soft keys appear.
2. Press the SONAR SET UP soft key.
The Sonar Set Up menu appears.
3. Press the trackpad until the SONAR HSB MODE parameter is highlighted
(selected).
4. Press the REPEATER soft key.
5. Press ENTER .
The display unit is now designated as the Repeater.
Full details on setting up your DSM250 and display are given in Chapter 4 .
81213_1.book Page 3 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 3: Getting Started
AUTO G RZ
50kHz
20
0
3-3
40
FREQUENCY ZOOM ft
BTM.LOCK
60
A-SCOPE
D6180-1
Figure 3-2: Typical Sonar Mode Display at Switch On
Chart Mode (Raychart Models only)
If the display was last used in chart mode before being powered off, it will return to chart mode the next time it is switched on. When the keys light up in chart mode, the Raychart graphic is displayed, followed by the caution:
WARNING:
Raychart chart displays are based on cartographic data that C-MAP believes to be accurate. However, you should not rely on these displays as your primary source of navigation. Rather, your Raychart should be used only as a backup to official government charts and traditional methods of navigation.
When you have read and understood the caution, press the CONTINUE soft key.
The chart is displayed.
If this is the first time the chartplotter has been turned on, and no chart card is installed, the display shows the small-scale world map and the default soft keys. Otherwise, the display shows the selected chart area and any data that were displayed when the display was last used.
81213_1.book Page 4 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
3-4 HD Series Fishfinders
Switch Off
WARNING:
To provide protection against the damaging effects of UV light, it is advisable to replace the sun cover provided when the color LCD display is not in use.
A reminder is displayed when you switch off the color LCD display.
➤
To switch the display unit off, press and hold the POWER key for three seconds. A countdown timer is displayed as shown below:
GAIN DISPLAY
VRM/EBL
MULTI
MARKS
Countdown timer: number of seconds to power off
POWER OFF IN
3s
ALARMS
RANGE
ENTER CLEAR MENU
3
SECONDS
Figure 3-3: Switch Off
POWER
D3599-2
When the counter reaches zero, a beep sounds and the display unit switches off. Release the POWER key.
Note: Switch the display unit off before you remove either the power or transducer cords.
81213_1.book Page 5 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 3: Getting Started 3-5
3.3 Operating Controls
You operate the fishfinder and chart systems using a variety of controls:
• A trackpad providing up, down, left, right and diagonal control of an on screen cursor
• Eleven dedicated (labeled) control keys
• Four soft keys with labels displayed on the screen
• Pop-up menus, displayed on-screen, from which you select options
• Database lists, displayed on-screen, which enable you to edit items
Note: The cursor is the cross-hair symbol (+) visible on the display. You move the cursor using the trackpad and use it to select a position or item on the chart.
The control keys are shown in Figure 3-5 . They are back-lit for night-time use when the display brightness is dimmed. When you use a control, a help message is displayed at the top of the screen (unless you switch help off as described in Chapter 4 ). The following paragraphs describe the controls and on-screen facilities.
Dedicated keys
Trackpad
Soft keys
Figure 3-4: 7" LCD Display Control Keys
Dedicated keys
81213_1.book Page 6 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
3-6 HD Series Fishfinders
Dedicated keys
Trackpad
Soft keys
Dedicated keys
Figure 3-5: 10.4" LCD Display Control Keys
Trackpad and Cursor
The trackpad has several functions:
• To move the cursor around the screen
• To select an item from a pop-up menu
• To adjust a variable soft key control
The cursor is used to:
• Select a position on the screen
• Select an item (for example: chart object on the chartplotter)
• Pan the chart display
Moving the Cursor
You can press on any of the four sections of the trackpad to move the cursor in that direction (up, down, left or right), or press two sections at the same time to move diagonally. The cursor moves faster as you continue to press the trackpad. The current cursor position is shown in the cursor data box (if selected).
81213_1.book Page 7 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 3: Getting Started 3-7
Note: During many operations you cannot move the cursor around the screen. If you cannot move the cursor using the trackpad, check the default soft keys are displayed (unless they have been switched OFF in system set up).
If not, press ENTER until they are displayed.
The cursor is normally displayed as a crosshair. However, in chart mode, if you have not moved the cursor for more than five seconds, when you next move it the cursor is outlined by a circle so it is easier to locate on the screen.
Context-Sensitive Cursor Control
The cursor is context-sensitive. When the cursor is positioned over special features on the display a text label appears to identify the feature as follows:
Table 3-1: Context-Sensitive Cursor Text Labels
Text Label
BOX
MOB
WPT
BL
VRM
ZOOM
A
➟
B
COG
HDG
POS
RTE
TIDE
Chart Icons
Feature
Data Box (any type)
Man Over Board marker
Waypoint
Course Over Ground vector
Heading vector
Vessel’s position
Route leg
Tide vector
Various
Fishfinder/Chart
Both
Both
Both
Bottom Lock
Variable Range Marker
Fishfinder
Fishfinder
Zoom Fishfinder
Ruler line Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Chart
Some items on the fishfinder/chartplotter screen, such as the cursor have information associated with them. Most information is displayed in a data box. The context-sensitive cursor enables you to move data boxes. In the case of Fishfinder VRM data, depth is displayed on the right hand side of the horizontal indicator and distance is displayed at the top of the vertical indicator.
81213_1.book Page 8 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
3-8 HD Series Fishfinders
Dedicated Keys
The dedicated keys: DISPLAY, MARKS, GAIN, VRM/EBL, MULTI,
ALARMS, RANGE, ENTER, CLEAR, MENU and POWER have fixed functions; the functions are similar on all HD Series displays. For example,
ALARMS is used to set up the system alarms on both a fishfinder and a chartplotter.
Some keys can be used in two ways:
• Press: Press the key momentarily and then release it. This method is used for most key operations.
• Press and hold: Press the key and hold it down for the length of time stated
(for example: 3 seconds), and then release it.
When you press a dedicated key, one of the following happens: i. The associated operation is performed—change chart scale ( RANGE ), for example.
ii. A pop-up menu is displayed, providing further options.
iii. A set of soft keys is displayed, providing further functions.
As you press a key, a single audio beep confirms the key action. If the keypress is not valid for the current screen or mode, three rapid beeps sound to indicate that no response is available. If desired, you can turn the key beeps off as part of your set up procedure (see Chapter 4 ).
Using the Dedicated Keys in Different Display Modes
When certain dedicated (hard) keys are pressed on a unit with the Raychart feature, the sets of soft keys that appear can vary depending on whether the currently selected mode is fishfinder or chart. The following describes the soft keys that appear in the Fishfinder and Chart modes.
MULTI key
In Sonar mode on all color displays:
70%
POWER
AUTO LO HI LIGHT
COLOR
SETTINGS
WHT LINE
OFF ON
D4896-2
81213_1.book Page 9 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 3: Getting Started
In Chartplotter mode on all displays:
70%
LIGHT
ALARMS
ALARMS key
In Sonar mode on all displays:
FISH
ALARM
OFF ON
SHALLOW
ALARM
DEEP
ALARM
ALARMS
In Chartplotter mode on all displays:
ALARMS SET UP
ARRIVAL ALARM
OFF TRACK ALARM
ANCHOR ALARM
GROUNDING ALARM
COUNTDOWN TIMER
ALARM CLOCK
0.01nm
ON
OFF
5M/1.0nm
00:33:00
OFF
D5031-1
3-9
SELECT ARRIVAL
ALARM RADIUS
D4265-4
Soft Keys
The four keys below the screen are called soft keys because their functions change according to the operation. The soft keys are grouped into related sets and subsets providing access to the various functions. The soft key labels are displayed on the screen just above the keys. The default soft keys are displayed until you press a key, or select an item on the screen; the soft keys associated with the action are then displayed.
FREQUENCY ZOOM MORE¬ CHRT SNR
D5013-1
The currently-selected soft key option is shown by its green background. If the key text is displayed in gray rather than in black, it is not currently available.
81213_1.book Page 10 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
3-10 HD Series Fishfinders
When you press a soft key one of the following happens: i. The associated operation is performed (for example: 50 kHz) .
ii. A sub-set of soft keys is displayed, providing further functions.
iii. A pop-up menu is displayed, providing further options.
As with dedicated keys, when you press a soft key a single audio beep confirms the key action. If the key-press is not valid for the current screen or mode, three rapid beeps sound to indicate that no response is available. If desired, you can turn the key beeps off as part of your set up procedure (see
Chapter 4 ).
Pop-Up Menus
Pop-up menus usually provide set up options. When a pop-up menu is onscreen, a set of associated soft keys is also displayed as shown in Figure 3-6 .
ALARMS SET UP
ARRIVAL ALARM
OFF TRACK ALARM
ANCHOR ALARM
GROUNDING ALARM
COUNTDOWN TIMER
ALARM CLOCK
0.01nm
ON
OFF
5M/1.0nm
00:33:00
OFF
SELECT ARRIVAL
ALARM RADIUS
D4265-4
Figure 3-6: Typical Pop-up Menu
You use the trackpad to select an option from the menu, then use the appropriate soft key to set the option. For example, you can toggle the OFF
TRACK ALARM on/off.
81213_1.book Page 11 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 3: Getting Started 3-11
Database Lists
The waypoints, routes and tracks that you create on the chartplotter are stored in database lists. You can view these lists and select items for editing.
WAYPOINT LIST
SYMBOL NAME
WAYPOINT 001
WAYPOINT 002
WAYPOINT 003
WAYPOINT 004
WAYPOINT 005
POSITION
BRG _186°
TEMP
---°
C
DATE --/--/--
50°21^966N
001°20^368W
RNG _21.0nm
DEPTH --m
TIME --:--:--
GOTO
WAYPOINT
EDIT
WAYPOINT
MAKE NEW
WAYPOINT
WAYPOINT
TRANSFER
D4262-2
Figure 3-7: Typical Database List
As with pop-up menus, when a database list is on-screen, a set of associated soft keys is also displayed. You use the trackpad to select an item from the list, then use the appropriate soft key to edit the item. For example, you can erase a waypoint or a route.
3.4 Simulator Mode
The HD Series Fishfinders include a simulator function that enables you to practice operating in Sonar and Chartplotter (Raychart models only) modes without data from the transducer or GPS system.
If you have not yet installed the full fishfinder system, you can still operate in
Simulator mode by connecting the module and display devices via the HSB cable. For power, connect a 12V or 24V DC power supply, attaching the red wire via a quick blow fuse to positive and the black wire to negative.
Fuse values:
Display unit:6A for 12V or 4A for 24V
DSM250: 8A
Note: Before using Simulator mode, make sure the HSB cable is connected from the DSM250 to the display unit and that both the DSM250 and display unit are connected to ship’s power.
81213_1.book Page 12 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
3-12 HD Series Fishfinders
Figure 3-8 demonstrates how to setup the DSM250 for Simulator mode;
Chapter 2 gives full installation details.
Digital Sounder Module PLUS Display Unit
Red Black hsb 2
DC Volts
D6197-2
RF Ground
Figure 3-8: Simulator Mode Setup
Viewing Simulator Data
MENU
SONAR
SET UP¬
After you have properly connected and powered up the DSM250 and display units, you can toggle Simulator mode on and off using the Sonar Setup menu.
➤
To view simulated sounder images:
1. Press the MENU key on display unit.
The Setup soft keys appear.
2. Press the SONAR SET UP soft key.
The Sonar setup menu pop-up is displayed.
3. Use the trackpad to move the selection bar over the option
SONAR SIMULATOR . The simulator soft keys are displayed.
4. Press the ON soft key to switch on the sonar simulator.
5. Press ENTER twice to return to the default display.
When simulator mode is on a simulator dialog box is displayed.
When the display is switched off then on again, simulator mode is maintained.
It is recommended that you select the System Set Up Menu and switch off simulator mode when you have finished.
Note: Any waypoints placed on the chartplotter in simulator mode are retained in the database list and are available for use in routes.
81213_1.book Page 1 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 4: System Setup 4-1
Chapter 4: System Setup
4.1 Introduction
MENU
Once you have installed your digital fishfinder system and are familiar with its basic operation (described in Chapter 2 and Chapter 3 ), you need to set it up so that it obtains the correct information from the equipment you have connected it to, operates according to your requirements, and displays information according to your preferences.
This is achieved using the soft key controls that are displayed when you press the MENU key.
In most cases, you will only need to use the MENU key options when you first set up your system. As you become more familiar with your system, you may decide to customize some aspects, such as the screen and help setting.
Note: All settings described in this chapter are retained when the unit is powered off. However, there is a one-minute delay from the time you make the setting change to when the DSM250 places it in memory. If you power down the sounder less than one minute after making a change, the setting is lost.
This chapter covers the following topics:
• Changing the default set up parameters
• System parameter functions and default settings
• Sounder specific parameter functions and default settings
• Chart specific parameter functions and default settings
You should check the functions of the parameters and decide on the new settings before making the changes.
Note: For units with the Raychart feature, the
SYSTEM SET UP
menu option from the chartplotter display is the same as that accessed from the fishfinder display
SYSTEM SET UP
menu.
81213_1.book Page 2 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
4-2 HD Series Fishfinders
4.2 Changing the Set Up Parameters
MENU
The set up parameters are divided into three sections:
• System , to control the aspects of the system that are not specific to the sounder or chart.
• Sonar , to control the fishfinder display preferences, including HSB mode, calibration and simulator.
• Chart , to control the chartplotter display (in fishfinders with the Raychart feature), including waypoint information, vectors and radar/chart synchronization.
Note: The GPS menu is described in Chapter 8 and the Track Set Up menu is described in Chapter 7.
This section provides instructions for displaying and changing the default values. The following sections list the parameters and their possible settings, and describe the function of each parameter in turn.
➤
To change the default settings:
1. Press the MENU key to display the set up soft keys. The options available depend on the selected operating mode.
Fishfinder
SYSTEM
SET UP¬
SONAR
SET UP¬
SCROLL
SPEED
TRIP
RESET
D5019-1
Chart
SYSTEM
SET UP!
CHART
SET UP!
TRACK
SET UP!
GPS
SETUP!
D4162-1
2. Press the soft key for the set up you desire.
The requested set up menu is displayed, listing the parameters and their current settings.
3. Use the trackpad to move the selection bar up and down the list. An arrow is displayed at the top or bottom right-hand corner if you can scroll the list to display further parameters.
As each line is highlighted, the soft keys are updated to show the settings available.
• For parameters that have a numeric value, or more than four possible settings, a scroll list is displayed above two of the soft keys.
81213_1.book Page 3 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 4: System Setup 4-3
• Some parameters are controlled by a slider that is displayed above two of the soft keys.
• For some parameters, a soft key provides access to a sub-menu of further options.
4. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired setting or, for scroll lists, use the soft keys to scroll forwards or backwards through the list until the desired setting is displayed. This setting is retained when you move the selection bar on to the next parameter in the menu list.
For sliders, press the appropriate soft key repeatedly to increase or decrease the slider value in individual steps, or press and hold the key to change the setting quickly.
5. Once you have set the desired values, press ENTER to clear the menu and return to the set up soft keys.
6. Press ENTER, MENU or CLEAR to clear the soft keys and return to the default display.
You can return all the settings to their original factory settings, if desired, by performing a factory reset as described in Chapter 9 .
81213_1.book Page 4 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
4-4 HD Series Fishfinders
4.3 System Set Up Parameters
SYSTEM
SET UP¬
The SYSTEM SET UP option enables you to set up your system configuration and personal preferences.
The following table lists the System menus and their options, shows the factory default setting, and provides a space for you to make a note of your new setting. Each parameter is described in the following subsections
Table 4-1: System Set Up Parameters
Menu Options Factory
Default
New
Setting
DATA BOXES
POSITION
SPEED
DEPTH
COG
SOG
TIME
DATE
WIND
WAYPOINT
CROSS TRACK ERROR
HEADING
LOG/TRIP
PILOT
VMG
TEMPERATURE
TIDE SET/DRIFT
BEARING MODE
CURSOR REFERENCE
CURSOR READOUT
DAY/NIGHT
HELP
SOFT KEYS
KEY BEEP
MOB DATA
PILOT POP-UP
MENU TIMEOUT PERIOD
DISTANCE UNITS
OFF, LAT/LONG, or TDs
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF, APPARENT, TRUE, BOTH
OFF, LAT/LON, RNG/BRG/TTG
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF, WIND, WPT, or BOTH
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
MAGNETIC or TRUE
MAG/TRUE or RELATIVE
OFF, LAT/LONG, RNG/BRG, or
BOTH
DAY/NIGHT
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
DR or POSITION
OFF or ON
NO TIMEOUT, 10, 20, or
30 SECONDS
NAUTICAL MILES, STATUTE
MILES, KILOMETERS, or
KILOHERTZ
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
TRUE
RELATIVE
RNG/BRG
DAY
ON
ON
ON
DR
OFF
NO TIMEOUT
NAUTICAL MILES
81213_1.book Page 5 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 4: System Setup
Table 4-1: System Set Up Parameters
Menu
SPEED UNITS
DEPTH UNITS
TEMPERATURE UNITS
VARIATION SOURCE
BRIDGE NMEA HEADING
NMEA-OUT SET UP
APB
BWC
BWR
DBT
DPT
MTW
RMB
RSD
RTE
TTM
VHW
VLW
WPL
GGA
GLL
RMA
RMC
VTG
ZDA
CURSOR ECHO
RADAR CURSOR IN
CHART CURSOR IN
SEATALK CURSOR OUT
CURSOR ECHO LOCAL
DATE FORMAT
TIME FORMAT
TIME OFFSET
GPS SOG/COG FILTER
COMPASS SETUP
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
Options Factory
Default
KNOTS KNOTS, MILES PER HOUR, or
KILOMETERS PER HOUR
METERS, FEET, or FATHOMS FEET
CENTIGRADE or FAHRENHEIT FAHRENHEIT
AUTOMATIC or MANUAL AUTO
OFF or ON OFF
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
OFF or ON
DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY
12 HOUR or 24 HOUR
UTC, or local offset value:
Plus or minus up to 12 hours, in whole hours
HIGH, MEDIUM, or LOW
LINEARISE COMPASS or
ALIGN HEADING
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
MM/DD/YY
12 HOUR
UTC
New
Setting
4-5
81213_1.book Page 6 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
4-6 HD Series Fishfinders
Table 4-1: System Set Up Parameters
Menu
LANGUAGE
SIMULATOR
Options Factory
Default
ENGLISH (US) ENGLISH (UK), ENGLISH (US),
DANISH, FRENCH, GERMAN,
DUTCH, ICELANDIC, ITALIAN,
NORWEGIAN, PORTUGUESE,
SPANISH, SWEDISH, or FINN-
ISH
OFF, DATA, RADAR, or BOTH OFF
New
Setting
Data Boxes
Press the SELECT BOXES soft key to display the data box sub-menu. This enables you to select up to 6 data boxes that you can display on the fishfinder.
Note:
1. A fixed set of sixteen of these data items are available for display in the Nav
Data half-screen window (see Chapter 5).
2. In addition to these grouped data boxes, boxes for the cursor readout,
VRM/EBL data, waypoint data, MOB data and simulator status are displayed when selected or when the appropriate function is active.
3. Radar data is only repeated if the display is connected to an hsb 2 Plus
Series radar master display.
Data boxes provide regularly used data in a compact form so that most of the graphics can still be seen. The ones you select here can be turned on and off as a group during normal operation. You can also move them around the screen individually using the context-sensitive cursor. Refer to Viewing Data Boxes on page 5-11) .
Bearing Mode
Note: This option only pertains if your system includes a radar display.
The mode (magnetic or true) of all the bearing and heading data displayed.
This is indicated in the radar status bar after the heading value, if displayed.
Cursor Reference
Note: This option is only available in Radar mode if your system includes a radar display and you have heading data from a compass.
The mode of the bearing data displayed for the cursor readout. The bearing information can be displayed in either of two forms:
• Relative: The bearing relative to your vessel’s heading.
81213_1.book Page 7 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 4: System Setup 4-7
• Mag/True: The actual bearing in either degrees magnetic or degrees true.
If you choose this mode, the selection you made for the previous parameter (Bearing Mode), °M or °T, is displayed in the cursor (Rng/Brg) data boxes. The current units are shown for the heading value in the status bar at the top of the screen.
Cursor Readout
Note: This option only pertains if your system includes a radar display.
This option controls whether the cursor data is shown in latitude and longitude or in range and bearing. Alternatively, you can show both types of readout, in separate boxes, or turn the cursor data box off.
You can also turn the cursor readout box(es) on and off during normal operation, via the SCREEN default soft key (see Switching the Cursor Data Box
On and Off on page 5-23) .
Day/Night
This option enables you to change the display between day and night modes.
NIGHT mode uses a different color palette, more suited to night time viewing.
The default setting is DAY .
Help
When Help is set to ON , a prompt appears when selecting a soft key or menu choice and when using the context-sensitive cursor. The help message is cleared when an action is selected.
Soft Keys
When the Soft Keys option is set to ON , the default soft keys are displayed if no other operation is in progress.
When the Soft Keys option is set to OFF , the default soft keys are only displayed when a soft key is pressed. The Soft Keys disappear if no operation is performed for 10 seconds.
Key Beep
This option controls whether or not the keys sound a tone when you press them.
81213_1.book Page 8 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
4-8 HD Series Fishfinders
MOB Data
This option controls whether MOB data is based on position data, or on dead reckoning (DR). Dead reckoning normally provides a better indication of the course to an object in the water, on the assumption that your vessel and the object are both subject to the same tide and wind effects.
Autopilot Pop Up
This option controls whether or not the autopilot pop up is displayed. When set to ON , when the status and locked heading of the autopilot changes, they are displayed in a pop up box. The box is removed from the display after two seconds.
When Autopilot Pop set to OFF , the pop up box is disabled.
Menu Timeout Period
With no timeout set, menus and soft key labels remain displayed until you clear them by pressing ENTER , CLEAR or the appropriate dedicated key.
If you set a value here, the menus and soft key labels will be cleared if a key has not been pressed for the specified number of seconds.
This setting does not affect the default soft key labels, which are controlled by the Soft Keys option (see above).
Units
You can set the units for speed, depth and temperature. The units you set will be used to display all data, including information received from other instruments on the system. However, the distance units do not affect the instrumented range of the radar, which is always in nautical miles.
Note: The ‘Units’ values set here are also used in the other display modes.
Variation Source
Note: This option is only available in Radar mode if your system includes a radar display.
The variation value is the difference between True and Magnetic direction data for heading or bearing values. The Variation Source option provides soft keys for selecting Auto or Manual variation mode, displays the current variation value for each and highlights the currently selected mode.
81213_1.book Page 9 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 4: System Setup 4-9
Auto Mode
If you select Auto mode, the unit obtains the value of variation automatically, normally from received data. The variation value that is used depends on the data available and is selected in the following order of priority:
1. Variation value from the same source as the heading data:
• If heading data is being taken from NMEA, then variation is also taken from NMEA
• If heading is taken from SeaTalk, then SeaTalk variation is used
2. Variation value from a different source:
• If heading data is being taken from NMEA, but no NMEA variation is available, then variation is taken from SeaTalk
• If heading is taken from SeaTalk, but no SeaTalk variation is available, then variation is taken from NMEA
3. A calculated variation value, using position data, if no SeaTalk or NMEA value is available
4. The current manual variation value, if no SeaTalk or NMEA value and no position data is available
Manual Mode
If you select Manual mode, by pressing either of the MANUAL keys, you can specify the local variation value according to the area in which you are operating. Press the appropriate MANUAL key to adjust the variation up or down, to a maximum of 30° East or West.
This value is then transmitted to any other SeaTalk instruments on your system. It is retained if you turn the display off and on again.
In Manual mode, incoming NMEA variation is ignored. However, if the variation is changed on another SeaTalk instrument, the new value is used and the manual value that is displayed is updated.
Note: The Manual variation value defaults to 0°, so it is important to set up a value if variation is not available from an external source.
Bridge NMEA Heading
HD Series Fishfinders display bridge NMEA input data to the SeaTalk bus
(see Section 2.9
). The Bridge NMEA Heading option can be used to prevent
NMEA heading data being bridged onto the SeaTalk bus.
For example, if you have a course computer connected on SeaTalk and
NMEA, and an active compass connected on NMEA (for MARPA), SeaTalk data overrides NMEA data in the course computer.
81213_1.book Page 10 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
4-10 HD Series Fishfinders
You should therefore switch OFF the Bridge NMEA Heading option to ensure the course computer receives the same NMEA heading input as the rest of the system.
NMEA-Out Set Up
This option lets you disable the transmission of specific NMEA sentences, which may be necessary if you have other instruments sending the same data as your fishfinder. See Appendix D for a list of NMEA input messages.
For example, if the DPT (depth) sentence is set ON but the fishfinder’s transducer is designed to sense temperature and speed only, the depth value will be transmitted as zero. If you also have an ST60 Depth instrument installed, there may be confusion between the zero depth sent by the fishfinder and the actual depth sent by the ST60. Turning OFF the DPT sentence disables the reading from the fishfinder.
The factory default for all NMEA sentences is transmission ON . Disable the sentence by selecting the OFF soft key. The following table displays the available NMEA sentences and their meanings.
Table 4-2: NMEA Sentences
MTW
RMB
RSD
RTE
TTM
VHW
VLW
WPL
GGA
GLL
RMA
Sentence
APB
BWC
BWR
DBT
DPT
Meaning
Autopilot Sentence “B”
Bearing & Distance to Waypoint
Bearing & Distance to Waypoint – Rhumb Line
Depth Below Transducer (see note below)
Depth (see note below)
Water Temperature
Recommended Minimum Navigation Information
Radar System Data
Routes
Tracked Target Message
Water Speed and Heading
Distance Travelled through the Water
Waypoint Location
Global Positioning System Fix Data
Geographic Position – Latitude/Longitude
Recommended Minimum Specific Loran-C Data
81213_1.book Page 11 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 4: System Setup 4-11
Table 4-2: NMEA Sentences
Sentence
RMC
VTG
ZDA
Meaning
Recommended Minimum Specific GPS/TRANSIT Data
Course Over Ground and Ground Speed
Time and Date
The changes do not take effect until after ENTER is pressed. Consult your
NMEA instrumentation documentation to determine which strings should remain ON .
Note: HD Series Fishfinders output the same depth value for DBT and DPT, regardless of the Depth Offset value in Sonar Setup.
Cursor Echo
Note: This option only pertains if your system includes a radar display that is connected to the fishfinder display via SeaTalk.
You can set up an integrated system so that radar and chartplotter displays connected via SeaTalk can display each other’s cursors.
Cursor echo functions so that you can display a chart cursor on the radar picture or a radar cursor on the chart picture. You cannot display a remote radar cursor in a radar window; nor can you display a remote chart cursor in a chart window. When the appropriate options are switched on, each display shows its own cursor plus the cursor of the other display with appropriate cursor text
( RDR or CHRT ) to indicate its origin. This means that you could move the cursor over a target on the radar display and check the identity of the target by looking at the radar cursor position on the chartplotter.
Press the CURSOR ECHO soft key to display the cursor transfer soft keys. The following options can be toggled ON or OFF :
• Radar Cursor In: displays the cursor from another radar on the chart display or chart window (default - OFF ).
• Chart Cursor In: displays the cursor from another or chartplotter on the radar display or radar window (default - OFF ).
Note: The remote display must have SeaTalk Cursor Out enabled.
• SeaTalk Cursor Out: enables the output, onto SeaTalk, of the display’s own cursor (default - OFF ).
• Cursor Echo Local: echoes the cursor position between open windows on the same display (default - ON ).
If you set the options to OFF , no cursor echo information is displayed.
81213_1.book Page 12 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
4-12 HD Series Fishfinders
Date and Time Settings
Set your preferred date format (DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY) and time format (12 or 24 hour). If you wish to display local time, use the soft keys to change from UTC to the desired time offset. This can be up to plus or minus 12 hours, in hourly steps.
GPS SOG/COG Filter
Note: This option only applies to systems with a GPS connected.
The SOG/COG filter averages the velocity vectors to compensate for the oscillating motion of the vessel, giving a clearer indication of the vessel’s course and speed. The filter does not affect the calculation of the GPS position.
The velocity vectors calculated from the GPS Signal give an instantaneous measure of speed and direction of the GPS antenna. The COG and SOG can therefore seem erratic under certain conditions. For example, when a vessel is moving slowly through rough seas, the antenna moves from side to side as well as in the direction of the vessel.
Slow moving vessels, or vessels sailing in rough seas will benefit from a high setting, whereas a power boat that can quickly change speed and direction will benefit from a low setting.
Select the SOG/COG filter setting as desired. This can be set to HIGH , MEDIUM or LOW .
Compass Set Up
Note: This option only applies to systems with a Raymarine heading sensor connected.
This option is used to calibrate a Raymarine heading sensor such as the
Pathfinder Smart Heading System. Controls are provided for LINEARISE
COMPASS which detects and corrects for heading errors caused by metal objects, and ALIGN HEADING which matches the displayed heading to a known heading or transit.
Refer to the Handbook supplied with your heading sensor for more details.
Language
Select the language in which you wish information to be displayed. The selected language will be used for screen text, labels, menus and options, but will not affect the letters displayed by the context-sensitive cursor. The language setting also affects the display format for lat/long position information.
81213_1.book Page 13 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 4: System Setup 4-13
Simulator
The simulator enables you to operate your display without data from the transducer and/or external data sources. The system set up simulator options have the following functions:
• Data provides simulated numerical data and a waypoint display.
• Radar (integrated systems with a radar display) provides simulated radar picture, with example targets. The picture does not change if you change the range, although the range rings are adjusted (see Pathfinder Radar documentation) .
• Both provides simulated data and radar picture.
When the simulator is switched on, a SIMULATOR data box is displayed during operation showing the simulation selected.
Fishfinder simulator mode is set in the Sonar setup menu, as described in
Section 4.4
.
4.4 Sonar Set Up Parameters
SONAR
SET UP¬
The SONAR SET UP option enables you to set up the fishfinder according to your system configuration and your personal preferences.
The following table lists the Sonar Set Up parameters and their options, shows the factory default setting, and provides a space for you to make a note of your new setting. Each parameter is described in the following subsections.
Table 4-3: Fishfinder Set Up Parameters
Parameter
TARGET DEPTH ID
COLOR BAR
DEPTH DIGIT SIZE
SONAR HSB MODE
DEPTH OFFSET
SPEED CALIBRATE
TEMP CALIBRATE
SONAR HISTORY
Options
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Factory
Default
OFF
ON
LARGE
SMALL
REPEATER
MASTER
Value
LARGE
REPEATER
0.0
0% to 200% 100%
-9.0 °F to +9.0 °F 0°F
LARGE or SMALL LARGE
New Setting
81213_1.book Page 14 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
4-14 HD Series Fishfinders
Table 4-3: Fishfinder Set Up Parameters
Parameter
SONAR INT REJ
Options
AUTO, LOW or
HIGH
SONAR SIMULATOR OFF
ON
Factory
Default
AUTO
OFF
New Setting
Target Depth ID
You can select whether or not the depth is displayed for displayed fishfinder echoes. When Target Depth ID is set to ON , the depth is displayed just above each fish echo. When set to OFF , the depth of each echo is not displayed.
Color Bar
The color bar indicates the range of echoes displayed in each color. When set to ON the color bar is displayed on the right hand side of the display.
Depth Digit Size
The depth under the boat is displayed in the bottom left hand corner of the fishfinder display. You can select small or large digits for the depth display.
Sonar HSB Mode
Depth data is sourced from the sonar master, which is the unit to which the transducer is connected. This setting was originally established for networks that have multiple hsb 2 Series Fishfinders for designating whether the
Fishfinder is a MASTER (directly displaying sonar data images) or a REPEATER display (connected via hsb 2 to the Fishfinder master and repeating its sonar data images).
The DSM250 is permanently set as the sonar master. For the sounder module to properly repeat its sonar image data to the display unit, the display must be designated as the sonar REPEATER .
The default setting is REPEATER . For HD Series displays, this setting should not be changed from the default.
Note: Ensure that only one device is designated as a sonar master. Having more than one master unit on the hsb 2 network c an cause unpredictable results .
81213_1.book Page 15 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 4: System Setup 4-15
Depth Offset
The depth offset is added to the measured depth value before it is displayed.
You can specify the depth as a positive value ( Waterline Offset ) or a negative value ( Keel Offset ). The depth offset can be adjusted in 0.1 increments of the units you have set for Depth Units: meters, fathoms, or feet. See Units on page 4-8 .
Speed Calibrate
If the transducer is equipped with a speed paddle wheel, the fishfinder calculates and displays the speed of the boat through the water. The speed calibrate option enables you to adjust the displayed speed so that it matches your actual speed through the water. You can adjust the displayed speed from
1% to 200%.
If the Fishfinder reading is too low, set Speed Calibration to more than 100%.
If the Fishfinder reading is too high, set Speed Calibration to less than 100%.
Temperature Calibrate
The fishfinder calculates and displays the temperature of the water. The temperature calibrate option enables you to adjust the displayed temperature.
You can adjust the displayed temperature by -9.0°F to +9.0°F.
Sonar History
Sonar History determines the number of data sample columns that appear on the screen at one time. The options are: SMALL , which displays 240 columns of data or LARGE , which shows 480 columns. Information displayed in a single column using the LARGE setting would occupy two columns with SMALL . As a result, twice as much data history is displayed under the LARGE setting. Data displayed using SMALL appears wider and scrolls across the screen faster.
The default setting is LARGE .
Sonar Interference Rejection
Two or more sonar-equipped vessels operating within range of each other can create interference on the sounder screen. This usually appears as vertical streaks in the water that do not represent actual targets.
HD Series Fishfinders include a SONAR INT REJ option that reduces such interference, either manually or automatically. LOW rejects only a small amount of the extraneous objects. Use this setting when you want to be sure that what has been removed are really false returns.
81213_1.book Page 16 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
4-16 HD Series Fishfinders
HIGH cleans up much more interference but can degrade the appearance of actual targets. AUTOMATIC selects the best rejection level for you.
The default setting is AUTOMATIC .
Sonar Simulator
The simulator enables you to operate your display without data from the transducer so you can become familiar with the unit’s features and functions.
All controls are functional in Simulator mode with the exception of STC.
Version/Serial Numbers
The area at the bottom of the Sonar Setup screen gives version information for the system.
This area is informational only; it is not editable.
DISPLAY SW VERSION displays the software version of the display unit.
MASTER SW VERSION displays the software version and product type of the master unit, which under most circumstances would be the DSM250.
MASTER S/N displays the serial number of the master unit, which under normal circumstances would be the DSM250.
81213_1.book Page 17 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 4: System Setup 4-17
4.5 Chart Set Up Parameters (Raychart Models)
CHART
SET UP¬
For Fishfinders with the Raychart feature installed, the CHART SET UP option enables you to set up the chartplotter according to your system configuration and your personal preferences.
The following table lists the Chart set up parameters and their options, shows the factory default setting, and provides a space for you to make a note of your new default setting. Each parameter is described in the following subsections.
Table 4-4: Chart Set Up Parameters
Parameter
CUSTOMIZE CHART
PLOTTER MODE
CHART
ORIENTATION
OBJECT
INFORMATION
Options
See below for details
OFF, ON
NORTH UP, COURSE UP,
HEAD UP
PALETTE (COLOR LCD) SHADE, SUNLIGHT
WAYPOINT SYMBOLS OFF, ON
WAYPOINT NUMBERS OFF, OFF
DEFAULT WAYPOINT
SYMBOL
HEADING VECTOR
, , ,
OFF, 3 MINS, 10 MINS,
INFINITE
COG VECTOR
TIDE VECTOR
OFF, 3 MINS, 10 MINS,
INFINITE
OFF, 10 MINS, 1 HOUR,
INFINITE
OFF, ON RADAR/CHART
SYNCH
DATUM SELECTION
POSITION OFFSET
WGS 84, LOCAL
OFF, ON
Factory Default
OFF
NORTH UP
OFF, ON POINTS, ON ALL ON ALL
SUNLIGHT
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
WGS 84
OFF
New Default
Customize Chart
This provides a list of chart options, enabling you to specify how the chart features are displayed. Most options can be toggled between on, off and custom. Custom passes on/off control to the SCREEN soft keys (see
Customizing the Screen Presentation Options on page 5-23 ).
81213_1.book Page 18 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
4-18 HD Series Fishfinders
The following features can be set using Customize Chart, factory default settings are shown in bold type:
• chart text ( on , off, custom)
• chart text size (small, normal , large)
• chart display (simple , detailed )
• chart boundaries ( on , off, custom)
• spot soundings (on, off, custom )
• depth shading limit (set the limit)
• depth contours ( on , off, custom)
• depth contour display (set the upper and lower limits)
• nav marks ( on , off, custom)
• nav marks icon ( international , US)
• light sectors (on, off, custom )
• caution and routing data (on, off , custom)
• marine features (on, off, custom )
• land features ( on , off, custom)
• icon display (simple, detailed , custom)
The factory default for CUSTOM options is OFF . This can be changed using the
SCREEN soft key in chart mode.
Plotter Mode
Plotter Mode enables you to zoom into a smaller area, even when no chart data is available for that scale. This enables you use the chartplotter functions at large scales even when a chart card is not installed.
Chart Orientation
The chart orientation is normally North Up, but can be changed to Course Up or Head Up if heading data is available. The orientation modes give the following displays:
• North Up: The chart is displayed with north upwards. As you change heading, the ship’s heading marker moves. This is the default mode and is the only mode available if there is no heading data.
• Course Up: The chart is stabilized and displayed with the currently selected course upwards. If you select a new course, the picture rotates to display the new course upwards.
The reference used for the Course Up depends on the information available. The first available in the following is used:
81213_1.book Page 19 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 4: System Setup 4-19 i. A locked heading over a SeaTalk connection ii. The heading at the time Course Up was selected
To update the Course Up reference while Course Up is the current mode, re-select Course Up from the set up menu.
• Head Up: The chart is displayed with the vessel’s current heading upwards. As the heading changes the chart will rotate.
Object Information
You can set Object Information ON ALL, ON POINTS or OFF to determine when an object identification pop-up is displayed. When set to ON ALL , the information pop up is displayed when the cursor is placed over any chart area for two seconds. ON POINTS enables the information pop up when the cursor is placed over a displayed chart object and OFF disables the information pop up.
Palette
The Palette option lets you specify which color palette, SHADE or SUNLIGHT , the display uses.
The Sunlight palette is optimized for best display clarity in bright sunlight. In dimmer conditions you may prefer the shade palette.
Waypoint Options
Waypoint Symbols controls whether or not the waypoints are shown on the
Chart display, with their appropriate symbols. The active waypoint and waypoints in the current route are always shown.
Waypoint Numbers controls whether or not the waypoint numbers are shown for any waypoints in the current route.
Default Waypoint Symbol lets you select the symbol you want used for waypoint display.
Vectors
Heading, Tide and Course Over Ground vectors can be displayed as a line from your vessel. The length of the vector is determined by your choice of
SOG and the time period. An infinite vector extends to the edge of the chart screen.
Heading Vector indicates your current heading.
COG Vector indicates your course over ground.
Tide Vector indicates the tide angle. Tide information is calculated from the speed through water, compass and position data.
81213_1.book Page 20 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
4-20 HD Series Fishfinders
Radar/Chart Synch
Note: This option is only available in Radar mode if your system includes a radar display.
If you have an hsb 2 Plus Series combined Fishfinder/Chartplotter display connected via hsb 2 to a Pathfinder Plus Series Radar display, you can select
Radar/Chart Synch ON or OFF . When set ON with chart and radar windows displayed, FIND SHIP can be used to synchronize the radar and chart images.
The chart is redrawn so that its center matches that of the radar display. The radar is redrawn to the scale and heading mode of the chart.
Datum Selection
You can select either WGS 84 or LOCAL datum. In LOCAL mode, you are presented with a list of datums. Use the trackpad to scroll through the list, then press ENTER to select the option and close the menu.
When you change datum selection, the system attempts to set any connected
GPS to the new mode, using SeaTalk and NMEA set up commands. A message shows whether the set up was successful or not.
WARNING:
Changing the chart datum does not cause any waypoint or routes stored in the chartplotter to move. Waypoints and routes may therefore appear to be at different positions when you change the datum.
When adding waypoints numerically to the waypoint list, or via SeaTalk, hsb 2 , or NMEA, it is important that they are referenced to the same datum that the chart is to be operated in.
Position Offset
You can offset the vessel position to allow for differences between the GPS and paper chart data. This may be useful if you are using a datum that is not available on the Chartplotter, or if you are referring to a paper chart drawn to unknown datum.
You can change the offset by moving the cursor to the known vessel position.
This offset is applied to all incoming position data. The default offset value is zero.
When position offset is switched on, all displayed vessel position data is annotated (C) to indicate it has been corrected.
81213_1.book Page 21 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 4: System Setup 4-21
➤
To switch the position offset on/off:
1. Select the POSITION OFFSET option, then press the OFFSET OFF ON soft key to toggle the option on/off. The last selected offset value is added to position data and the vessel is displayed at the corrected position.
➤
To set a new offset value:
1. Select the POSITION OFFSET option, then press the SET UP OFFSET soft key.
If necessary, position offset is automatically toggled on.
2. Use the trackpad to move the cursor to the desired vessel position; the cursor position is displayed in a position offset data box.
3. Press the ACCEPT OFFSET soft key, the vessel is displayed at the new position. Press ENTER to return to the default display.
➤
To set the offset value to zero:
1. Select the POSITION OFFSET option, then press the SET UP OFFSET soft key
2. Press the CANCEL OFFSET soft key. The position offset value is set to zero.
81213_1.book Page 22 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
4-22 HD Series Fishfinders
81213_1.book Page 1 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display 5-1
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display
5.1 Introduction
This chapter provides instructions for using the HD Series Fishfinder display units. It will help you to become familiar with the display and the functions of the controls before you start using the unit. Detailed information on Sonar operations is provided in Chapter 6 . Chartplotter operating details are given in
Chapter 7 and Chapter 8 .
Note: All settings described in this chapter are retained when the unit is powered off. However, there is a one-minute delay from the time you make the setting change to when the DSM250 places it in memory. If you power down the sounder less than one minute after making a change, the setting is lost.
Simulator
The the HD Series Fishfinder system includes a simulator function that enables you to practice operating your Fishfinder or Chartplotter (Raychart models only) without data from the transducer or GPS system. See for
Section 3.4
for information on using simulator mode.
Changing the Brightness & Color Settings
The MULTI key on the LCD Fishfinder provides controls to set up the display colors and brightness. You can choose the background color and the color threshold. Color threshold lets you determine which echoes are displayed, by selecting the minimum color strength the fishfinder uses. You can also select the color set, for a bold or soft color palette. The brightness of the screen can be adjusted over a wide range, suitable for viewing in daylight (high brightness level) or at night (low brightness level).
The key lighting is automatically adjusted as you alter the screen lighting, so that you can always find the keys. If you set the backlight to a high level, the key lighting is dimmed; if you set the backlight to a low level, the key lighting level is increased.
Adjusting the Brightness
➤
To change the screen brightness:
1. Press the MULTI key to display the soft key controls:
81213_1.book Page 2 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
5-2 HD Series Fishfinders
70%
POWER
AUTO LO HI LIGHT
COLOR
SETTINGS
WHT LINE
OFF ON
MULTI
D4896-2
2. The LIGHT soft key indicates the brightness level, use the trackpad (up or down) to increase or decrease the setting. You can press and hold the trackpad to change the setting more rapidly. The brightness level is adjusted as you change the setting.
3. Press ENTER to return to the default screen, with the new brightness level.
➤
To set the screen brightness to 100%:
Press and hold the MULTI key for one second. The brightness is increased to
100%.
The brightness level is retained when you switch off the display.
Note: During night-time use, the brightness may be set very low, when subsequently operated during the day it may not be apparent that the display is on.
In this case, press MULTI then use the trackpad to increase brightness. Alternatively, press and hold MULTI for one second to set the brightness to 100%.
Selecting the Background Color
Five colors are available for the fishfinder display background – black, dark gray, light gray, white and dark blue. The color you select is used on all the fishfinder windows (scrolling bottom, Zoom, Bottom Lock and A-Scope).
MULTI
COLOR
SETTINGS
B'GROUND
COLOR
You may find that you need to change the background color in different light conditions. For example, a white background is probably easiest to see in bright sunlight, but a black background may be preferable at night.
➤
To change the background color:
1. Press the MULTI key to display the soft key controls, then press COLOR SET-
TINGS.
2. Press the BGROUND COLOR soft key. The background color soft keys are displayed below a pallet of available colors. The selected color is highlighted.
3. Press the left or right BACKGROUND COLOR soft key until the desired color is highlighted.
The fishfinder display changes, so you can see the effect as you change the background color.
4. Press ENTER or CLEAR twice to return to the MULTI soft keys.
81213_1.book Page 3 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display 5-3
Selecting the Color Threshold
You use the color threshold control to determine the minimum echo strength that is displayed. Each range of echo strengths is displayed in a color as shown in the color bar; you select the minimum strength that is displayed by blanking echo colors below the desired minimum.
If you blank a color, the corresponding echoes are displayed in the background color. You can remove up to six colors, but you cannot remove the strongest color.
MULTI
COLOR
SETTINGS
COLOR
THRESH
The color threshold you select is used on all the fishfinder windows (scrolling bottom, Zoom, Bottom Lock and A-Scope).
➤
To change the color threshold:
1. Press the MULTI key to display the soft key controls, then press
COLOR SETTINGS .
2. Press the COLOR THRESH soft key. The color threshold soft keys are displayed below color indicator showing the available echo colors.
The weakest color is at the bottom of the indicator, with the strongest color at the top; you can remove colors from the bottom up.
3. Press the left or right ADJUST COLOR THRESHOLD soft key to change the color threshold.
Pressing the left key removes out the next color up, it increases the minimum strength displayed.
Pressing the right key displays the next color down, it decreases the minimum strength displayed.
4. Press ENTER or CLEAR twice to return to the MULTI soft keys.
Selecting the Color Set
MULTI
COLOR
SETTINGS
➤
To change the color palette:
1. Press the MULTI key to display the soft key controls, then press
COLOR SETTINGS .
2. Press the COLOR SET soft key, which toggles between color set 1 (bolder colors) and color set 2 (softer colors).
3. Press ENTER or CLEAR twice to return to the default screen.
81213_1.book Page 4 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
5-4 HD Series Fishfinders
5.2 Controlling the Display
You control the display using the cursor and control keys. You start all operations from the default screen, that is the default soft keys are displayed:
Fishfinder
FREQUENCY ZOOM BTM.LOCK
A-SCOPE
D5010-1
Chart
ROUTE GOTO SCREEN FIND SHIP
D4160-1
When you have completed an action using the soft keys, press ENTER or
CLEAR to return to the default screen. You may need to press ENTER or
CLEAR several times to back-track through the soft key hierarchy.
Note: If you have set up your system so that the default soft keys are not displayed all the time, press any soft key to display the labels.
The remainder of this section describes how to select the mode of operation and switch half-screen windows on/off. The following sections describe how to set up the display for the Fishfinder and for the Chart (for fishfinder displays with chartplotter functionality).
The controls are summarized in the laminated Quick Reference cards that accompany this handbook.
Selecting the Mode of Operation
If the data is available on your system, the following display modes can be selected:
DISPLAY
• Sonar (Fishfinder)
• Chart
• Radar
• Data Log
You use the DISPLAY key to select the full-screen display mode. The
DISPLAY key also accesses the soft keys for the half-screen window options for additional information.
➤
To select the mode:
1. Press the DISPLAY key.
The DISPLAY pop-up appears, as shown in Figure 5-1 .
81213_1.book Page 5 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display 5-5
SPLIT
HOR VER
2. Continue to press DISPLAY until the desired mode is shown.
The selected mode is shown by an icon with a red border and the mode is displayed on the screen. The associated soft keys are also displayed.
3. Press ENTER or CLEAR to display the selected full screen mode.
or
You can set Windows On to split the display into two half-screen windows
(horizontal or vertical) to show supplementary data, or to display sonar and chart or radar simultaneously. Split screen options are described in the following sections
"DISPLAY" TO SELECT FULL SCREEN OPTION
SOFTKEYS TO SELECT WINDOW OPTION
0
CURSOR 0
BRG
RNG
099o R
2.410
nm
RADAR CHART SONAR LOG ft
60
D6212-1
Figure 5-1: Selecting the Mode Using the DISPLAY Key
Horizontal Half -Screen Window Options
Using horizontal half screens, the main operating mode is displayed in the upper window; you choose what is displayed in the lower window.
The following information, if available on your system, can be shown:
Table 5-1: Horizontal Half-Screen Window Options
Full-screen mode Horizontal Half-Screen Window Options
Sonar Mode
Chart Mode
Radar Mode
Data Log Mode
CDI, BDI, Depth/Temp, Chart, Radar
CDI, BDI, Nav Data, Radar, Sonar
CDI, BDI, Nav Data, Chart, Sonar
Half-screens not available
81213_1.book Page 6 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
5-6 HD Series Fishfinders
• Chart display: If data is available on the display or via the hsb 2 link, it can be displayed.
• Radar display: If data is available via the hsb 2 link, it can be displayed.
• Depth/temp graph (Sonar mode only): This shows a plot water temperature and depth against time.
• CDI: This gives the Course Deviation Indicator graphical display, with data relating to the target waypoint.
• BDI: This gives the Bearing and Distance Indicator graphical display, with data relating to the target waypoint.
• Nav Data (Chart or Radar mode): This shows sixteen data boxes, providing navigational data in the units specified in your set up.
➤
To select a Horizontal half-screen window for display:
1. From the full-screen Sonar or Chart mode, press the DISPLAY key.
The following soft keys are displayed with an image of each available window:
DISPLAY
Fishfinder
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOWS
SPLIT
HOR VER
D5011-1
DISPLAY
Chart
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOW
D4156-2
2. In Sonar mode, set SPLIT to HOR . To select a different window, press either
SELECT WINDOWS soft key until the desired window is highlighted.
3. If necessary, press WINDOWS OFF ON to toggle Windows on .
4. Press ENTER .
5. To toggle Windows off, press the WINDOWS OFF ON soft key.
If any data boxes were displayed at the bottom of the full-screen image, they are switched off until you return to full-screen mode. However, you can use the SCREEN soft key in chart mode to switch the data boxes on - they are displayed in the upper window.
Note: You can use the SCREEN soft key in chart mode to switch the data boxes on. They are displayed in the upper window.
Figure 5-2 and Figure 5-3 show the half-screen horizontal windows in Sonar
Mode.
81213_1.book Page 7 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display
CDI Window
AUTO GCRZFH
50kHz
40 ft
STEER PORT
WAYPOINT 001
FREQUENCY ZOOM BTM.LOCK
XTE
0.28
nm
WPT BRG
351°
T
WPT RNG
26.8
nm
TTG
03 h :59 m
A-SCOPE
20
0
5-7
BDI Window
AUTO GCRZFH
50kHz
40
40
30 ft
225°T
20 20 nm nm
10 10
STEER STARBOARD
WAYPOINT 001
FREQUENCY ZOOM BTM.LOCK
XTE
1.45
nm
WPT BRG
351°
T
WPT RNG
23.1
nm
TTG
01 h :13 m
A-SCOPE
20
0
Depth/Temperature Window
AUTO GCRZFH
50kHz
20
0
40 ft
TEMPERATURE (°C)
26.4
26.0
25.6
25.2
24.8
24.4
24.0
23.6
23.2
60 50
FREQUENCY
DEPTH (ft)
12.8
40
ZOOM
30
MINUTES
20
BTM.LOCK
10
50
91
131
170
0
200
A-SCOPE
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOWS
SPLIT
HOR VER
D6165-1
Chart Window
AUTO GCRZFH
50kHz
20
0
40 ft
FREQUENCY ZOOM MORE¬ CHRT SNR
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOWS
SPLIT
HOR VER
WINDOWS
OFF ON
Figure 5-2: Horizontal Half-Screen Windows
SELECT
WINDOWS
SPLIT
HOR VER
D6166-1
81213_1.book Page 8 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
5-8
Radar Window
AUTO GCRZFH
50kHz
20
0
40 ft
HD Series Fishfinders
FREQUENCY ZOOM MORE¬ RDR SNR
DISPLAY
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOWS
SPLIT
HOR VER
D6211-1
Figure 5-3: Radar Half-Screen Window
Vertical Half -Screen Window Options
You can also use the DISPLAY key to select a data window that is vertically split with the full-screen Sonar mode display. Vertical half-screen windows are only available in Sonar mode. Three data windows are available, each window provides several large-format data boxes for specific information as follows:
• Data Window A – provides surface temperature with a 30 minute temperature graph, speed through water, and depth.
• Data Window B – provides position, course over ground (COG), speed over ground (SOG), and depth.
• Data Window C – provides waypoint range and bearing, course over ground (COG), speed over ground (SOG), and depth.
81213_1.book Page 9 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display
"DISPLAY" TO SELECT FULL SCREEN OPTION
SOFTKEYS TO SELECT WINDOW OPTION
0
CURSOR 0
BRG 099o R
RNG 2.410
nm
5-9
RADAR CHART SONAR LOG ft
60
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOWS
SPLIT
HOR VER
D6191-1
Figure 5-4: Selecting Vertical Half-Screen Windows
Note: Receiving and displaying position data requires that a GPS is connected to your Raymarine system.
AUTO GC F
TEMPERATURE
50kHz
0
AUTO GC F
POSITION
50kHz
81°06^34W
28°17^07N
0
AUTO GC F
WAYPOINT
50kHz
Rng 2.95nm
Brg 093°T
0
F
20.1
COURSE OVER GROUND COURSE OVER GROUND
15.1
20 20 20
30 MINUTES
SPEED
0
10.1
SPEED OVER GROUND
T
SPEED OVER GROUND
T
40 40 40
DEPTH kts
DEPTH kts
DEPTH kts
FREQUENCY ZOOM ft
BTM.LOCK
60
A-SCOPE FREQUENCY ZOOM ft
BTM.LOCK
60
A-SCOPE FREQUENCY ZOOM ft
BTM.LOCK
60
A-SCOPE
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOWS
SPLIT
HOR VER
D6207-1
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOWS
Figure 5-5: Vertical Half-Screen Windows
SPLIT
HOR VER
D6208-1
WINDOWS
OFF ON
SELECT
WINDOWS
SPLIT
HOR VER
D6209-1
81213_1.book Page 10 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
5-10 HD Series Fishfinders
DISPLAY
Returning to the Full-Screen Display
To return to the full-screen display you can turn windows off, as previously described. To return to full-screen display:
➤
Press and hold the DISPLAY key for 2 seconds to return to the currently selected full-screen (upper window) display.
Switching Between Sounder and Other Modes
When you have both sounder and chart displayed in half-screen windows the soft key CHRT SNR enables you to toggle operating control between the sounder and the chart window.
Fishfinder
FREQUENCY ZOOM MORE¬ CHRT SNR
D5013-1
Chart
ROUTE GOTO MORE¬ CHRT SNR
D5025-1
➤
To change the active window when you are displaying the sonar/chart horizontal split window, press the CHRT SNR soft key to toggle control between the sounder and chart display. The current active display is highlighted in red on the CHRT SNR label and the cursor appears in that window.
Alternatively, when you have both sounder and radar displayed in half-screen windows the soft key RDR SNR lets you toggle operating control between the sounder and the radar window.
FREQUENCY ZOOM MORE¬ RDR SNR
D6213-1
➤
To change the active window when you are displaying the sonar/radar horizontal split window, press the RDR SNR soft key to toggle control between the sounder and radar display. The current active display is highlighted in red on the RDR SNR label and the cursor appears in that window.
If a window is active (that is, control of the cursor via the trackpad is available in that window) and you switch windows off, control automatically returns to the full-screen (upper/right window) mode.
81213_1.book Page 11 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display 5-11
5.3 Display Unit Control Functions
The sounder automatically locates the bottom and displays the information using an appropriate scroll speed and range. However, controls are provided so you can adjust scroll speed and range. You can also select the transducer frequency and select certain data for display. This section describes how to use the controls to set-up your fishfinder display:
• Viewing data boxes
• Changing the scroll speed
• Changing the range
• Selecting the power setting
• Selecting the frequency
In addition this section describes how to select the fishfinder display options.
• Display Bottom Lock
• Display A-Scope
• Zoom an area of the image.
Viewing Data Boxes
The cursor data box and a group of up to six data boxes can be displayed if the information is available on your system. You select which data is displayed in the boxes during system set up as described in Chapter 4 . The default data box positions are along the bottom of the display. Each box can be moved to the desired position on the screen using the context-sensitive cursor.
To switch data boxes on and off as a group you need to go to Chart mode.
Switching the data boxes on/off in Chart mode also affects their display in
Sonar mode and vice-versa. You can switch them on and off individually using the System Set Up menu, as described in Section 4.3
.
Changing the Scroll Speed
The standard fishfinder display is the scrolling bottom image. This is a graphical representation of the echoes seen by the sounder. New information appears at the right hand side of the display and scrolls to the left.
The speed at which the display scrolls is adjustable, but the same section of the bottom is displayed regardless of scrolling speed. As illustrated in Figure 5-6 , if you select a faster speed, more detail is displayed and is useful when you are looking for fish; if you select a slower speed the information remains on the display for longer.
81213_1.book Page 12 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
5-12
Section of bottom shown at higher scroll speed
HD Series Fishfinders
Display shows more detail
Section of bottom shown at slower scroll speed
Display shows longer history
D5024-3
Figure 5-6: Effect of the Scroll Speed
The fishfinder defaults to manual scroll adjustment at full speed (100%). Use the trackpad to decrease the scroll speed in 10% increments down to 0%
(pause). Unlike automatic adjustment, manual scroll speed is not related to boat speed over the bottom.
Alternatively you can have the sounder automatically adjust the scroll speed, based on boat speed. If you select automatic adjustment, the scroll speed is related to boat speed as follows:
• Less than, or equal to 0.5 kts, scroll speed is constant at 10%
• Between 0.5–15 kts, scroll speed varies linearly with boat speed
• Greater than 15 kts, scroll speed is constant at 100%
MENU
SCROLL
SPEED
You can also pause the display in either manual or automatic mode. The depth indication continues to be updated.
➤
To change the scroll speed:
1. Press MENU , then press the SCROLL SPEED soft key.
2. If necessary, press the SCROLL AUTO MAN soft key to toggle the setting between AUTO and MAN .
3. For manual adjustment, use the trackpad to increase the scroll speed. You can press and hold the trackpad to change the value more rapidly.
4. Press ENTER to return to the Menu soft keys, then ENTER again to return to the default display.
81213_1.book Page 13 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display 5-13
MENU
PAUSE
➤
To pause the scrolling display:
1. Press MENU , then press the SCROLL SPEED soft key.
2. Press the PAUSE soft key. The display stops scrolling and the key is relabeled RESUME .
3. To resume scrolling, press the RESUME soft key. The key is relabeled
PAUSE .
4. Press ENTER to return to the Menu soft keys, then ENTER again to return to the default display.
Selecting the Power Setting
The POWER soft key provides adjustment of the transducer signal. When AUTO is selected (default), the sounder automatically determines the power setting based on the current depth, speed, and (bottom) signal strength. When AUTO is selected the current automatic power setting is indicated in the top status line by an L (low) or H (high) .
If, however, you wish to manually adjust the power to suit current conditions, you can select either LO or HI power. LO power (100 W) is normally used in depth ranges less than 8 ft (2.4 m) and HI power (600 or 1000 W, depending on your transducer) is typically selected for depths greater than 12 ft (3.7 m).
MULTI
The power setting is retained when the unit is powered off.
➤
To change the power setting:
POWER
AUTO LO HI
1. Press the MULTI key to display the soft key controls.
2. Press the POWER soft key to toggle between AUTO , LO, or HI power. The selected setting is highlighted.
3. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the default screen.
Changing the Range
By default, the digital sounder automatically adjusts the display range, selecting the shallowest range that keeps the bottom in the lower half of the display window. Shift is disabled (the value is ignored) when auto-range is selected.
Alternatively, the RANGE key lets you select the maximum depth displayed on the scrolling bottom and A-Scope displays.
You can also set the shift value to move the image window up or down within the current range.
81213_1.book Page 14 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
5-14 HD Series Fishfinders
The following range/shift values are available:
Table 5-2: Range and Shift Values
Feet Fathoms Meters
1500
2000
2500
3000
1
3500
4000
4500
5000
200
250
300
400
600
800
1000
30
40
50
60
80
100
150
Range Shift Range Shift Range Shift
5 1 1 1 2 1
10
15
20
2
5
5
2
3
4
1
1
1
4
6
8
1
2
2
10
10
10
20
20
25
50
5
8
10
15
20
25
30
1
2
2
5
5
5
10
10
15
20
25
30
40
50
10
10
10
5
5
2
5
50
50
100
100
200
200
250
500
500
500
250
300
400
1000 500
875 600
40
50
60
80
100
150
200
10
10
20
20
25
50
50
50
100
100
100
150
60
80
100
150
200
300
400
500
600
800
1000
1200
1000 700
1500 750
1250 850
175
250
170
1400
1500
1700
100
200
200
250
300
20
20
25
50
50
100
100
350
500
425
1
Depths greater than 3000 ft (1000 m) require a high performance transducer
RANGE
➤
To adjust the range and shift values:
1. Press RANGE , this sets adjustment to manual and the range soft keys are displayed. The range adjusts up or down depending on the direction pressed.
2. Use the RANGE key to adjust the range: press the up arrow to select a shallower range, press the down arrow to select a deeper range.
81213_1.book Page 15 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display 5-15
RANGE
AUTO MAN
3. If desired, press the RANGE AUTO MAN soft key to select AUTO range.
AUTO range is indicated by the letter R in the status bar.
4. To adjust the shift, press the appropriate SHIFT soft key: Use the up soft key to select a shallower shift, use the down soft key to select a deeper shift.
The image window is shifted up by the selected amount. Pressing the SHIFT keys sets the range to MANUAL .
5. Press ENTER to return to the default display.
Hunt Mode
HD Series Fishfinders feature a digital “Hunt mode” that automatically searches for the bottom while the sounder is in Auto Range. If bottom cannot be determined while AUTO RANGE is selected, the sounder pings the last known depth, and then incrementally increases the ping depth to a maximum value determined by the transducer type (see Table 5-3 ) until the bottom is found. If bottom is not found, the sounder returns to the original depth and repeats the process.
If AUTO FREQUENCY is also selected (see Selecting the Frequency on page 5-16 ) when the sounder completes the auto range hunt process, the process is repeated in the other frequency. If MANUAL FREQUENCY is selected, hunt mode only continues in the selected frequency. This process continues until bottom is detected or you switch to manual range mode.
The maximum depth to which Hunt mode searches is determined by the high power output of the transducer, as follows:
Table 5-3: Maximum Depths for Hunt Mode
600 W
1000 W
200 kHz
1000 ft (400 m)
1500 ft (500 m)
50 kHz
3000 (1000 m)
5000 (1700 m)
For example, let’s say a L1250D with a 1000 W transducer is set for auto range
& auto frequency and bottom is currently detected at 500 ft using 200 kHz.
The bottom signal becomes lost, so the unit switches to Hunt mode. Pinging begins at 500 ft using 200 kHz and increments to 1500 ft. If bottom is not detected, the sounder switches to 50 kHz, repeats pinging at 500 ft, and increments up to a maximum of 5000 ft. If bottom is still not detected, the sounder returns to 500 ft using 200 kHz to continue the process.
When bottom is found, Hunt mode ceases and the sounder adjusts to the range and frequency appropriate for the new depth.
81213_1.book Page 16 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
5-16 HD Series Fishfinders
While the HD Series Fishfinder searches in Hunt mode, a constantly changing
‘stairstep’ pattern is displayed as the sounder switches depths and frequencies.
This situation is most likely to happen while the vessel is travelling at a high rate of speed.
If you do not wish to view this stairstep hunt pattern, switch to MANUAL
RANGE to turn off Hunt mode. Then, when you reduce speed, return to AUTO
RANGE to continue the hunt for bottom.
Selecting the Frequency
HD Series Fishfinders use dual frequency sonar—50 kHz and 200 kHz— and can be used in either auto or manual modes.
The fishfinder can automatically select the appropriate frequency, based on the current display range. As the depth increases while in Auto Frequency mode, the sounder module shifts from 200 kHz to 50 kHz at 250 ft
(80 m). As the depth decreases, the sounder module switches from 50 kHz to 200 kHz at 150 ft (50 m).
The Auto Frequency setting is also useful for automatically searching for bottom, as described in Hunt Mode on page 5-15 .
Alternatively, you can manually select either frequency, or both frequencies simultaneously (split frequency). Each is suitable for a particular purpose:
50 kHz Frequency
When using this frequency, the transducer scans a wide area. The 50 kHz signal penetrates water well, so is good for use in deep water.
200 kHz Frequency
When using this frequency, the transducer scans a narrower area, but produces a more detailed view. The 200 kHz signal is good for finding fish near the bottom or close together. It is better for use in shallow water.
FREQUENCY
Split Frequency
The transducer can operate in both 50 kHz and 200 kHz frequencies at the same time. If you choose split frequency operation, the scrolling bottom display is split horizontally. The upper half shows the 200 kHz detailed view and the lower half shows the 50 kHz image.
➤
To change the frequency:
1. Press the FREQUENCY soft key. The frequency selection soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the appropriate soft key – 50 KHZ, 200 KHZ or SPLIT.
The scrolling bottom is displayed in the selected frequency.
81213_1.book Page 17 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display 5-17
If you choose split, the scrolling bottom is displayed in both frequencies with 200 kHz in the upper window and 50 kHz in the lower window.
3. If necessary, press the AUTO FREQ OFF ON soft key to select AUTO frequency. AUTO frequency is indicated by the letter F in the status bar.
4. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the default display.
You can choose the split frequency display with the fishfinder display options,
Bottom Lock, A-Scope, or Zoom.
Using Bottom Lock
The scrolling bottom display provides a top-down view, referenced from the surface of the water. Bottom Lock shows a water column of fixed height, referenced from the bottom, that appears flat. It removes bottom detail to provide an image of objects directly above the bottom and is useful when you are looking for fish that feed close to the bottom.
You can select the Bottom Lock image to be vertically split with the scrolling bottom display, or it can replace the scrolling bottom display.
As illustrated in Figure 5-7 , the bottom is shown as a straight line. Note that some bottom features may extend above this line. The actual depth reading is given in the bottom left hand corner of the Bottom Lock display.
Range intervals on Bottom Lock are measured up from the bottom (rather than down from the surface). Thus, the bottom is shown as zero and the top number indicates the maximum distance above the bottom being displayed. You can adjust the Bottom Lock range.
If the A-Scope or Zoom image was displayed, selecting Bottom Lock automatically switches OFF A-Scope and Zoom.
If you have split frequency selected, the Bottom Lock image is displayed in both frequency windows.
BTM.LOCK
If Target Depth ID is ON (see Target Depth ID on page 4-14 ), the target depth is displayed as distance from the bottom.
➤
To display the Bottom Lock image:
1. Press the BTM. LOCK soft key. The Bottom Lock selection soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the BTM. LOCK OFF ON soft key to toggle the function ON .
3. Press the BTM. LOCK FULL SPLIT soft key to toggle between a full window bottom lock image or split windows. The bottom lock image is displayed.
If you select split windows, the fishfinder display is split vertically, with the bottom lock image in the left hand window and the scrolling bottom display in the right hand window.
81213_1.book Page 18 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
5-18 HD Series Fishfinders
In a split window display, a vertical bar appears (along the right hand edge of the scrolling bottom image) that references the range being displayed in the bottom lock window. This bar varies in height as the bottom lock range is changed.
4. To adjust the range, press the appropriate BTM LOCK RANGE soft key: press the up arrow to select a larger range, press the down arrow to select a smaller range.
5. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the default display.
AUTO GC Z H
200kHz
0
30
20
20
40
10
0
60
BL
BL ft
FREQUENCY ZOOM BTM.LOCK
A-SCOPE
D6186-1
Figure 5-7: Bottom Lock Display with Split Windows
➤
To reposition the bottom lock image:
1. Use the trackpad to move the cursor to the bottom image until the text BL is displayed near the cursor.
2. Press ENTER , a horizontal line appears, indicating the cursor is active. Use the trackpad to move the line to the desired bottom lock image position.
3. Press ENTER to reposition the bottom lock image, or CLEAR to cancel the operation.
81213_1.book Page 19 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display 5-19
Using A-Scope
A-SCOPE
A-SCOPE
MODE
1 2 3
The scrolling bottom display provides a historical record of sonar echoes. Use the A-Scope screen to show raw sonar data directly from the transducer beam.
This gives you a “real time” image of fish and bottom structure directly below the transducer. This function is very useful in showing the strength of the echo returned from a fish. At the lower end of the window, A-Scope also displays the patented Bottom Coverage width indication.
➤
To display the A-Scope image:
1. Press the A-SCOPE soft key. The display is split vertically, with the A-Scope image in the right hand window and the scrolling bottom image in the left hand window.
2. Press the A-SCOPE MODE soft key to select one of the three modes for
A-Scope, as demonstrated in Figure 5-8 : i. Mode 1, in which the A-Scope image is angled outward as the signal width (indicated with dotted lines) increases with depth.
ii. Mode 2, in which the image expands to take up the entire A-Scope window, providing greater resolution.
iii. Mode 3, in which only the left hand side of the image displayed in Mode
2 expands to the entire A-Scope window. This mode provides the greatest resolution.
3. Press ENTER to accept your selection.
A-SCOPE
OFF ON
Note: If the Bottom Lock or Zoom image is displayed, selecting A-Scope automatically switches
OFF
Bottom Lock and Zoom.
If you have split frequency selected, the A-Scope image is displayed in both frequency windows.
➤
To remove the A-Scope image:
1. Press the A-SCOPE soft key.
2. Press the A-SCOPE ON OFF soft key to toggle off A-Scope.
3. Press ENTER .
81213_1.book Page 20 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
5-20
Mode 2
HD Series Fishfinders
Mode 3 A-SCOPE Mode 1
AUTO G Z
50kHz
0
25
50
75
FREQUENCY ZOOM BTM.LOCK
52.3
A-SCOPE
52.3
A-SCOPE
52.3
A-SCOPE
D6189-2
Figure 5-8: The Three Modes of A-Scope
Using Zoom
ZOOM
Zoom enlarges all or part of the scrolling bottom display. You can select automatic zoom so the sounder keeps the bottom in the lower half of the display window. Alternatively, you can manually pick the area to be zoomed.
➤
To select Zoom:
ZOOM
FULL SPLT
1. Press the ZOOM soft key.
2. Press the ZOOM ON OFF soft key to toggle zoom on.
3. Press the ZOOM FULL SPLT soft key to toggle between a full window zoom image or split windows.
If you select split windows, the display is split vertically, with the zoom image in the left hand window and the scrolling bottom display in the right hand window. See Figure 5-9 .
In a split window display, a vertical Zoom Range Bar appears (along the right hand edge of the scrolling bottom image) that marks the range being displayed in the zoom window. This bar varies in height with the selected zoom level. The depths of the upper and lower boundaries of the Zoom
Range Bar are displayed in the upper and lower right corners of the Zoom window.
81213_1.book Page 21 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display 5-21
AUTO G RZ
50kHz
55
20
0
Zoom Cursor , controlled by trackpad
Manual mode only
ZOOM
40
Zoom Factor x4 60
Zoom Range Bar
FREQUENCY ZOOM
Figure 5-9: Zoom with Split Screen
BTM.LOCK
A-SCOPE
D6200-1
ZOOM
AUTO MAN
ZOOM
X 2 4 6
4. Press the ZOOM AUTO MAN soft key to toggle the setting between AUTO and
MAN . The automatic setting adjusts the position of the zoom window so that bottom details are always in view. The manual setting enables you to reposition the range of the zoomed image.
5. For zoom level selection, press the ZOOM X 2 4 6 soft key until the desired zoom level is selected. The greater the zoom, the smaller the area you are viewing, so the smaller the Zoom Range Bar.
6. Press ENTER or CLEAR to select.
➤
To turn off Zoom:
ZOOM
ZOOM
OFF ON
1. Press the ZOOM soft key.
The Zoom soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the ZOOM ON OFF soft key to toggle zoom off.
3. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the default display.
If manual zoom is selected, you can reposition the area of the image that is zoomed.
➤
To reposition the zoom window:
1. If you have not already done so, make sure the unit is set to
MANUAL zoom.
2. If the cursor is not already visible, press ENTER for the cursor to appear.
3. Use the trackpad to place the cursor in the zoom window. The text ZOOM is displayed near the cursor, as in Figure 5-9 .
81213_1.book Page 22 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
5-22 HD Series Fishfinders
4. Press ENTER . A horizontal Zoom Position Line appears, indicating the cursor is active. See Figure 5-10 .
5. Use the trackpad to move the Zoom Position Line up or down on the screen:
Moving the line UP toward the surface moves the Zoom Window DOWN toward the bottom.
Moving the Zoom Position Line DOWN moves the Zoom Window UP.
Note: If you wish to move the window beyond what is displayed, you must move the Zoom Position Line to the edge of the window, press
ENTER
, return the Zoom Position Line to the opposite edge of the window, and then repeat the process. You may need to do this several times.
6. After you have moved the Zoom Position Line to the desired position, press ENTER to reposition the zoom image, or CLEAR to cancel the operation.
AUTO G RZ
50kHz
55 0
20
ZOOM
Zoom Position Line , move UP to lower Zoom window move DOWN to raise window
40 x4 60
FREQUENCY ZOOM BTM.LOCK
A-SCOPE
D6201-1
Figure 5-10: Repositioning the Zoom Window
Selecting Zoom automatically switches OFF Bottom Lock and A-Scope, if either of these images were being displayed.
If you have split frequency selected, the selected Zoom image is displayed in both frequency windows.
Note:
1. The vertical Zoom Range Bar shows the range being displayed in the zoom
(left side) window.
2. The size of this zoom range is determined by the zoom factor (2x, 4x, or 6x).
3. The position of the zoom range on the scrolling bottom (right side) window is determined by whether automatic or manual zoom mode is used:
81213_1.book Page 23 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display 5-23
AUTO positions the zoom range at the sea bottom.
In MANUAL, the range is positioned by moving the Zoom Position Line with the trackpad.
5.4 Chart Display Control Functions (Raychart Models)
Customizing the Screen Presentation Options
The SCREEN soft key lets you set the following screen presentation options on or off:
CRSR BOX
OFF ON
CHRT GRID
OFF ON
DATABOXES
OFF ON
CUSTOM
OFF ON
D4177-1
Switching the Cursor Data Box On and Off
The cursor data box provides the cursor’s position in latitude/longitude and/or bearing/range. If you wish to see a full image, you can switch the data box off.
➤
To control the cursor data box:
SCREEN
CRSR BOX
OFF ON
1. Press the SCREEN soft key.
2. Press the CRSR BOX soft key to toggle the setting from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF .
3. To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER .
➤
You can move the cursor data box using the context-sensitive cursor.
Switching Chart Grid On and Off
SCREEN
CRSR BOX
OFF ON
The Chartplotter display includes grid lines of latitude and longitude, which you can use to help determine position on the chart. The grid lines can be switched on if desired.
➤
To turn the chart grid on or off:
1. Press the SCREEN default soft key.
2. Press the CHRT GRID soft key to toggle the setting from OFF to ON or from
ON to OFF .
To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER .
Data Boxes
A group of up to six data boxes can be displayed, if the information is available on your system. You select which data is displayed in the boxes during system set up as described in Chapter 4 .
81213_1.book Page 24 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
5-24 HD Series Fishfinders
The default data box positions are along the bottom of the display. Each box can be moved to the desired position on the screen using the context-sensitive cursor.
Note: If you select fishfinder, BDI, CDI or Nav Data for display in a halfscreen window, the data boxes are temporarily hidden.
At any time, you can switch the group of data boxes on or off using the SCREEN soft key. When first installed, the boxes are all OFF . When the display unit is switched off and on again, the data boxes return to their last-used states ( ON or
OFF ) and positions.
SCREEN
Note: The SCREEN soft key does not control the sixteen data boxes that can be displayed in the half-screen window.
➤
To switch the group of data boxes on or off:
1. Press the SCREEN default soft key.
2. Press the DATABOXES soft key to toggle the setting from ON to OFF or from
OFF to ON .
BOX
To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER .
If you turn the data boxes on and none are displayed, you need to select the ones you require using the system set up menu, as described in Section 4.3
.
➤
To move any data box:
1. Use the trackpad to position the cursor over the box until the letters BOX are displayed.
2. Press ENTER to take control of the box, use the trackpad to move it to the desired position, and press ENTER again.
Custom Options - Chart Mode
When chart details have been customized in the Chart Set Up menu (as described in Section 4.5
) the SCREEN soft key can be used to switch the custom chart options off or on:
When set to ON , all chart options set to CUSTOM in the Customize Chart menu are displayed; when set to OFF , options set to CUSTOM are not shown.
SCREEN
CRSR BOX
OFF ON
The factory default for custom chart options is ON .
➤
To switch the customized options on or off:
1. Press the SCREEN default soft key.
2. Press the CUSTOM soft key to toggle the setting from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF .
To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER .
81213_1.book Page 25 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display 5-25
Moving Around the Chart
You will normally operate the chartplotter with the chart showing your vessel’s current location. The default orientation is North-Up and the vessel moves across the screen. You will need to move the chart if your vessel moves out of the area currently displayed, or if you wish to examine or place waypoints in another area. Alternatively, you can home the cursor onto the vessel using FIND SHIP .
There are four ways in which you can move the chart:
• Use the trackpad to move the cursor to the edge of the chart. The chart will pan across. This method is useful if the area you wish to see is only just off the screen.
• Use the context-sensitive cursor to change the chart center.
• Automatically re-center the vessel using the FIND SHIP soft key.
• Change the chart scale to zoom out and in to a new area centered on the cursor position. This method is useful if the area you wish to see is a long distance away.
Changing the Chart Center
POS
POS
You can move the area of the chart displayed on the screen using the contextsensitive cursor. This enables you to center your vessel in the middle of the screen, or to move the chart so that your vessel is displayed off-center anywhere on the screen.
➤
To center the chart:
1. Use the trackpad to move the cursor to the vessel’s position. The cursor text
POS is displayed.
2. Press CLEAR . The chart is moved so that your vessel’s position is in the center of the screen.
3. Use FIND SHIP , as described in the following section.
➤
To move your vessel’s position off-center:
1. Move the cursor over your vessel’s position until the letters POS are displayed.
2. Press ENTER to take control of the chart position. The letters POS are now in inverse video and the cursor symbol has changed to a four-way arrow.
This indicates that the cursor can be used to move the chart in any direction.
81213_1.book Page 26 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
5-26 HD Series Fishfinders
D4278-1
Figure 5-11: Changing the Chart Center
3. Use the trackpad to move the cursor to the desired position.
4. Press ENTER to select the position and return to normal cursor control. The chart is redrawn with the vessel position at the cursor.
Alternatively, you can press CLEAR to abandon the move and leave the chart (and vessel) in its former position.
Using FIND SHIP
FIND SHIP is used in chart mode to re-draw the chart with the vessel at the center and the cursor homed onto the vessel.
ROUTE GOTO SCREEN FIND SHIP
D4160-1
When you press FIND SHIP the following occur:
• The chart is re-drawn with the vessel’s position in the center.
• The cursor is homed onto the vessel position and moves with it.
• When the vessel moves near the edge of the chart window, the chart is redrawn to place the vessel and cursor at the center again.
• The status bar indicates vessel position, speed and course over ground.
➤
To release the cursor from homed mode press the trackpad to move the cursor away from the vessel’s current position. The status bar shows the cursor position, range and bearing.
81213_1.book Page 27 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display 5-27
RANGE
RANGE
Changing the Chart Scale
The RANGE key enables you to change the chart scale so that you can see a smaller or larger area on the screen.
Plotter mode is available to enable you to zoom into a smaller area, even when no chart data is available for that scale. Section 4.5
describes how to set plotter mode on/off.
The cartographic detail available on charts varies according to the chart scale and some areas include detail at smaller scales than others. This can cause blank areas on the display when adjacent areas with different levels of detail are displayed. To reduce this effect you can use the Chart Set Up options (see
Section 4.5
) to set chart display detail to simple. Then, as you zoom in, charted areas are displayed but with less detail shown.
You can change the chart scale for two purposes:
• To see either more detail (of a smaller area) or a larger area (in less detail) on the screen.
• To move the display to another area of the chart, by zooming out to a small scale chart, then zooming in on another position centered on the cursor.
Each time you press the RANGE key, the chart scale changes to the next available setting. The status bar indicates the distance from top to bottom of the screen, in nautical miles.
Increases the chart distance
Vertical distance displayed on chart
RANGE
Decreases the chart distance
6nm CSR 50 45'980N
POS 001 01'490W
Status Bar D4175-3
➤
To change the scale quickly, press and hold the desired arrow on the RANGE key.
The distance indicator at the left-hand end of the status bar is updated whenever you change the chart scale.
➤
To zoom in to a larger-scale (more detailed) chart:
1. Use the trackpad to position the cursor in the area you wish to see in more detail.
2. Press the lower part of the RANGE key to zoom into the area.
The section of the chart around the cursor is enlarged to fill the screen with a larger-scale chart showing more detail. The cursor is now positioned in the center of the screen.
The distance indicated at the top left of the screen is updated.
81213_1.book Page 28 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
5-28 HD Series Fishfinders
3. If further chart enlargement is available using the current chart card you can press the bottom of the RANGE key to zoom in again, re-positioning the cursor first if desired.
An area of further chart detail is indicated by a box around the area as shown in Figure 5-12 .
Chart Boundary indicates further detail is available inside
RANGE
D4279-2
Figure 5-12: Chart Boundaries
4. When no further chart detail is available, as you press the bottom of the
RANGE key, the effect depends on whether Plotter Mode is on or off as follows:
• If Plotter Mode is Off, the chart scale remains unchanged, indicating the smallest chart scale is displayed.
• If Plotter Mode is On, the scale is decreased and the message NO CHART
DATA is displayed. The vessel, waypoints, routes and tracklines are displayed without cartography.
The chart information is restored when you return to a chart scale for which the information is available.
➤
To zoom out to a smaller-scale (less detailed) chart, simply press the upper part of the RANGE key as many times as desired.
81213_1.book Page 29 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 5: Adjusting the Display 5-29
Radar/Chart Overlay
If radar data is available from another display connected on hsb 2 , the radar targets can be overlaid onto the full-screen chartplotter display. The radar/ chart overlay option helps you to distinguish between fixed, charted objects and other objects that could be moving vessels. Some radar controls are available in overlay mode.
The following criteria must be true for radar/chart overlay to function correctly:
• Position and heading data are provided so that vessel position and orientation can be determined.
• The vessel must be displayed on screen.
• The chartplotter must be in North Up or Course Up mode (see Section 7.7).
• The chartplotter range must be between 1/4nm and 48nm (equivalent to a radar range of 1/8nm to 24nm).
• Custom range scales are disabled on the radar.
• The radar must be transmitting.
To ensure the vessel remains on the screen, you could use Find Ship (see Using
FIND SHIP on page 5-26 ) to home the cursor onto the vessel.
When Radar/Chart overlay is switched on, the status bar indicates OVL . If the option is switched on but the overlay is not visible (because one of the above criteria has failed), the status bar indication changes to (OVL) .
When Radar/Chart overlay is switched on the soft key MORE...
provides access to the SCREEN soft key and to the radar controls TARGETS and MARPA .
The radar GAIN control is also active in overlay mode.
Note: Radar/Chart overlay is displayed at the current chart range. You should be aware that if radar is shown on any other display, its range will match that displayed on Radar/Chart overlay. Conversely, if you change the radar range on any display, the Radar/Chart overlay image will change to the new radar range.
➤
To select radar/chart overlay:
1. Press the DISPLAY key to show the DISPLAY pop-up, then if necessary press again to select Chart mode.
2. Press the OVERLAY OFF ON soft key to toggle the option on.
The two highest intensity radar returns are displayed in purple, over the chart image. The radar image is translucent, so that chart text, contours and outlines are visible beneath the radar targets.
81213_1.book Page 30 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
5-30 HD Series Fishfinders
81213_1.book Page 1 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 6: Sonar Operations 6-1
Chapter 6: Sonar Operations
6.1 Introduction
Basic Sonar operation, including a description of the different display options, was given in Chapter 3 . This chapter helps you the get the most from your
Fishfinder. It describes how to fine-tune the image and use the controls to get additional information.
Note: Many of the parameters on the HD Series Fishfinders have both manual and automatic modes. The automatic setting takes advantage the hardware’s advanced digital technology. As a result, the sounder typically performs better in automatic mode than in manual.
For better performance, Raymarine recommends that you select AUTO mode wherever it is an option.
This chapter covers the following topics:
• Interpreting and Adjusting the Fishfinder Image, including fish and bottom indications, using the white line feature and adjusting gain (sensitivity)
• Viewing Data Windows
• Setting up and Using Alarms for fish, shallow water and deep water
• Using a VRM to Determine Depth and Distance from Boat to a particular spot
• Placing Waypoints
• Using the Man Overboard (MOB) function
Note: The settings described in this chapter are retained when the unit is powered off. However, there is a one-minute delay from the time you change the setting to when the DSM250 places it in memory. If you power down the sounder less than one minute after making a change, the setting is lost.
6.2 Interpreting and Adjusting the Fishfinder Image
The HD Series Fishfinders use sound waves (sonar) to find fish and show the bottom of a lake or sea. The transducer sends high-frequency sound waves down into the water. These sound waves strike fish, the bottom, or other objects in the water and return as echoes. The fishfinder interprets these echoes to present an image of the fish and bottom.
The strength of echoes is indicated by different colors. You can use this information to determine the size of fish and the bottom structure. Other objects in the water, such as debris and air bubbles, also return echoes.
81213_1.book Page 2 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
6-2 HD Series Fishfinders
These echoes are generally weaker than the fish or bottom echoes and produce background noise or clutter on the Fishfinder display.
The Fishfinder provides controls to reduce the background noise and to adjust the way in which echoes of different strengths are displayed. The color
Fishfinders also let you select the background color and remove the display colors for weaker echoes. Refer to Changing the Brightness & Color Settings on page 5-1 for details on these two functions.
The Fishfinder provides a White Line feature which helps to distinguish between the bottom and fish (or other items such as weed) that are close to the bottom.
Fish Indications
When the Fishfinder detects a fish, it displays an arch-shaped mark. In general, a larger arch indicates a larger fish, though this rule is not always true.
Let’s say that there are two fish of the same size: one is close to the surface, the other is near the bottom. The fish which is close to the surface has a larger arch because, being closer, more sound waves get returned to the Fishfinder.
To display the depth of the fish, switch on the TARGET DEPTH ID from the
SONAR SET UP menu, as described in Section 4.4, Sonar Set Up Parameters .
The sound waves are actually reflected by the swim bladder near the center of the fish, not by the body of the fish. The size of this swim bladder is different for different kinds of fish and this can affect the size of fish arches on the image. A fish with a large swim bladder produces a large fish arch, while a fish with a small one produces a small arch. Several arches together show a school of fish. Figure 6-1 illustrates some typical fish indications.
81213_1.book Page 3 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 6: Sonar Operations 6-3
An arch-shaped image indicates a fish.
50 kHz
The same fish appears differently when shown by the
50 kHz or 200 kHz transducer beams.
200 kHz
A shallow arch is generated when the the boat is moving slowly.
This indicates a group of small fish.
A fish moving under a stopped boat shows as a line.
When the boat is moving very fast, a fish appears as two parallel lines.
D5017-2
Figure 6-1: Fish Indications
Effect of Frequency and Boat Speed
The return from a fish has a different appearance depending on the frequency used: 50kHz produces a wide beam, so a fish spotted by this frequency gives a broad arch; the 200 kHz beam is narrower so the same fish produces a narrower arch.
The shape of the arch is also affected by the speed of the boat. If the boat is moving slowly, the arches tend to be longer; if the boat is moving more quickly, the arches are short and peaked. If the boat is moving very fast, a fish may be indicated by vertical lines.
In Bottom lock mode the fish arches may appear distorted as the bottom topography is removed from the image.
Bottom Indications
The bottom usually produces a strong echo, enabling the Fishfinder to see great detail. The Fishfinder can indicate many different kinds of bottom conditions.
As illustrated in Figure 6-2 , a hard bottom appears as a thin line.
81213_1.book Page 4 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
6-4
A Hard bottom (sand)
B Soft bottom (mud)
C Rocky bottom
HD Series Fishfinders
D White line feature on:
D5016-2
Figure 6-2: Fishfinder Bottom Indications
An uneven bottom which is covered with rocks or coral produces a complex display; the bottom image is irregular, with long tails pointing upward. A wreck produces a similar image.
A softer bottom or a bottom covered with seaweed produces a wide line, as the sound waves reflect from different layers of the bottom. In Figure 6.2b, the
Fishfinder is getting a good echo from the bottom, so the upper layer of the bottom is shown as dark gray.
Notice that the lower layer of the bottom is shown as a lighter gray, this indicates a weaker echo. This could mean that the upper layer is soft; some sound waves may get through this layer and be reflected by a more solid layer below.
It is also possible that the sound waves are making two complete trips – hitting the bottom, bouncing off the boat, then reflecting off the bottom again. This can happen if the water is shallow, the bottom is hard, or gain is set high.
Using White Line
The White Line feature separates echoes from fish near the bottom and the bottom itself. When the White Line is switched on, the Fishfinder displays the echoes differently.
81213_1.book Page 5 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 6: Sonar Operations 6-5
MULTI
WHT LINE
OFF ON
With color LCDs, the strongest echoes are displayed in the background color with a thin line on top. All other echoes remain unchanged.
➤
To switch the white line feature on and off:
1. Press the MULTI key. The WHT LINE soft key is displayed.
2. Press the WHT LINE soft key to toggle the white line feature ON or OFF .
Adjusting Display Gain (Sensitivity)
The fishfinder provides controls for GAIN , COLOR GAIN , and STC . These controls, accessed from the GAIN key, are used to reduce background noise and determine how different strength echoes are shown. Automatic adjustment of GAIN or COLOR GAIN is available, alternatively you can manually adjust any of these parameters using the trackpad.
AUTO MANUAL
GAIN
GAIN
ADJUST
200 50
45% 75%
CRUISING COLR GAIN
A
U
T
O
STC
Note: Automatic Gain settings take advantage the hardware’s advanced digital technology. As a result, the sounder typically performs better in automatic mode than manual. For better performance Raymarine recommends selecting AUTO mode for all Gain options.
If you change the settings, the new GAIN , COLOR GAIN , or STC values and mode (auto or manual) remain set even when you turn off the display.
GAIN
ADJUST
200 50
You adjust gain for each transducer frequency independently. Press the GAIN
ADJUST soft key to highlight the frequency for which you are making adjustments. You may change settings for one frequency while displaying the other.
➤
To adjust a parameter:
GAIN
ADJUST
200 50
1. Press the GAIN key. The gain sliders are displayed. The slider last used is highlighted (displayed in inverse video) to show that it is selected.
2. If necessary, press the GAIN ADJUST soft key to select the desired frequency for adjustment.
3. If necessary, press the desired soft key to highlight (select) the desired slider.
Press it again, if necessary, to toggle between AUTO and MANUAL modes.
4. In manual mode, use the trackpad to move the selected slider up or down.
You can press and hold the trackpad to move the slider quickly rather than in single steps.
81213_1.book Page 6 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
6-6 HD Series Fishfinders
MANUAL
80%
GAIN
AUTO
45%
CRUISING
As you move the slider, the value displayed in the slider is updated. The new setting takes immediate effect.
Note: Because the changes to the settings take effect immediately, you cannot revert to the previous settings by pressing CLEAR .
5. When you have set all the controls to the levels you desire, press ENTER or
CLEAR to return to the default display.
Gain
The GAIN , or sensitivity, of the display adjusts background noise by varying echo strength for display. The value of the GAIN control determines the strength above which echoes are displayed. If the gain is low only the strongest echoes are displayed. As the gain is increased weaker echoes (from air bubbles, for example) are displayed.
Pressing the GAIN soft key cycles the sounder from manual through three levels of automatic gain adjustment.
Manual gain should be set high enough to see fish and bottom detail but without too much background noise. Generally, a high gain is used in deep and/or clear water; a low gain in shallow and/or murky water.
The automatic gain modes finds the ideal sensitivity level for you, based on depth and water conditions. Automatic gain modes take advantage the hardware’s advanced DSP technology. As a result, the sounder typically achieves a sharper image in any of the automatic gain modes than is possible in manual mode.
The fishfinder provides three pre-defined automatic gain settings:
CRUISING is the lowest automatic gain setting. It is ideal for viewing sonar images with a minimum of background noise as you are travelling to your fishing spot.
TROLLING is a slightly higher gain setting that displays more detailed echoes as you search for targets.
FISHING is the highest automatic gain setting. It gives the best details of the targets you have located but also displays the most background noise and surface clutter.
Note: The automatic gain modes are named so as to suggest when you might use them. However, it is not necessary for you to select Fishing Mode, for example, only when you are fishing. You may want to take advantage of Fishing
Mode’s higher gain even when cruising at high speeds. Use your personal preference to determine which automatic gain mode to use.
81213_1.book Page 7 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 6: Sonar Operations
MANUAL
50%
CLR GAIN
MANUAL
15%
STC
6-7
Color Gain
The COLOR GAIN determines how echoes of different strengths are displayed.
Seven colors per palette are available and the echo strengths are divided into seven bands to correspond with each shade of color.
The color bar on the right hand side of the display, when set to ON in the Sonar
Set Up menu (see Section 4.4
), shows the colors being used, with strongest echo color at the top and the weakest echo color at the bottom.
The COLOR GAIN control sets the lower limit for the top color band:
All echoes with a signal strength above this value are displayed in the strongest color.
All echoes weaker than this value are divided equally between the remaining colors.
Setting a low value produces wide band for the weakest color, but a small signal band for the other colors; setting a high value gives a wide band for the strongest color, but a small signal band for the other colors.
Note: The Fishfinder also provides a COLOR THRESHOLD control to reduce the number of colors displayed. You can use COLOR THRESHOLD with COLOR
GAIN to determine how echoes are displayed.
The Fishfinder provides automatic or manual COLOR GAIN adjustment.
Automatic adjustment displays colors based on current conditions, with as many colors as possible, while minimizing noise and clutter. As conditions change the auto-color gain adjusts. If you select manual adjustment, you will need to re-adjust the gain as conditions change.
STC
STC (Sensitivity Time Control) reduces surface clutter by reducing the gain in the top 100 ft of the display. This function is useful for reducing noise (caused by air bubbles and floating debris) that often appears in shallow water. A low
STC value has little effect on gain in shallow water; a high STC value decreases the gain in shallow water so that only the strongest echoes are displayed.
Although you can manually set the STC level, Raymarine recommends letting the sounder module choose the proper level for you by selecting AUTO STC .
Automatic STC mode takes advantage the hardware’s advanced DSP technology, which typically achieves a sharper image in auto mode than is possible in manual mode.
STC is not available in Sonar Simulator mode.
81213_1.book Page 8 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
6-8 HD Series Fishfinders
6.3 Using Alarms
Three ALARMS are available to alert you of fish, shallow water, and deep water. Each alarm can be toggled ON and OFF independently. For the shallow and deep water alarms, you set the depth at which the alarms are triggered, ranging from 2–3000 feet (or 2–4900 feet for units high performance transducers).
You may want to use the shallow and deep water alarms when you are anchored. Set the limits to just above and below your anchor depth. The
Fishfinder triggers an alarm if the anchor drags and the boats moves into shallower or deeper water.
• Fish Alarm – If this alarm is ON the unit sounds a buzzer whenever it finds a fish. Different buzzer tones are used to indicate fish detected by the
50 kHz and 200 kHz frequencies.
• Shallow water – You set depth at which the shallow water alarm triggers.
When the depth is less than that set, the buzzer sounds and a pop-up window describing the alarm is displayed. You cannot set the shallow alarm to be deeper than the deep alarm.
• Deep water – You set depth at which the deep water alarm triggers. When the depth is more than that set, the buzzer sounds and a pop-up window describing the alarm is displayed. You cannot set the deep alarm to be shallower than the shallow alarm.
Note: The Deep Alarm must be set at a depth that is greater than the depth at which the Shallow Alarm is set. Conversely, the Shallow Alarm must be set at a depth that is less than the depth at which the Deep Alarm is set.
After you have acknowledged the sounding of a shallow or deep water alarm, a minimum of 30 seconds must elapse before a another shallow/deep alarm can sound again.
The top line status bar shows the condition of the alarms:
•
• indicates an alarm is enabled. The speaker symbol is unfilled until an alarm is triggered and silenced, then the symbol is shown solid.
• S indicates the shallow alarm is enabled; a pop-up window indicates when the alarm is triggered.
• D indicates the deep alarm is enabled; a pop-up window indicates when the alarm is triggered.
indicates the fish alarm is enabled.
81213_1.book Page 9 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 6: Sonar Operations 6-9
External Alarms
All SeaTalk system alarms (except autopilot, shallow, and deep) alarms are received and displayed on the Fishfinder. You can silence these alarms by pressing any key. No other action is taken by the Fishfinder except to silence the alarm.
➤
To set an alarm
1. Press the ALARMS key. The alarms soft keys are displayed.
ALARMS
FISH
ALARM
OFF ON
SHALLOW
ALARM
DEEP
ALARM
D5031-1
2. For the shallow or deep alarms, press the SHALLOW ALARM or DEEP ALARM soft key, and then use the up or down soft keys to change the alarm limit.
Press the up arrow (right) soft key to select deeper water; press the down arrow (left) soft key to select shallower water.
The depth is in the units selected in system set up (see section Section 4.4
)
3. If desired, press the ALARM OFF ON soft key to toggle the alarm on or off. If you turn the shallow or deep alarm off, its value is retained and will be used when you turn the alarm on again.
4. Press ENTER or CLEAR to save the changes and clear the list.
➤
To silence an alarm and clear the alarm message, press any key.
6.4 Using VRM to Determine Depth & Distance from Boat
VRM/EBL
The VRM (variable range marker) key is used on the Fishfinder to determine the depth and distance-behind-boat of an object on the display. The VRM function is available on the scrolling fishfinder display, bottom lock and zoom windows.
A VRM is displayed as a cross hair with height and width of the display window. The center of the crosshair is the reference for which depth and distance-behind-boat are displayed. You can use the context-sensitive cursor to move the VRM over a particular object.
Depth is displayed, in the system units, on the right hand edge of horizontal line. In the scrolling fishfinder and zoom windows depth is measured from the surface down. In the bottom lock window, depth is measure from the bottom up.
Distance-behind-boat is displayed next to the vertical line, at the top of the window. The VRM distance units correspond to the depth units assigned in the
System Set Up Parameters (see page 4-4) as follows:
81213_1.book Page 10 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
6-10 HD Series Fishfinders
System Depth Unit VRM Distance Unit
Meters meters
Feet
Fathoms feet feet
VRM/EBL
VRM
VRM/EBL
The distance-from-boat continues to update as your boat moves. However, the vertical line does not scroll with the scrolling fishfinder image. If the display range changes, the VRM adjusts its relative position so that it does not move out of the visible display area.
When you switch on the VRM, it is displayed at its last position (unless off screen, in which case it is displayed on-screen).
If the Fishfinder is in split frequency display mode or a zoom window is displayed with the scrolling fishfinder image, the VRM is shown in both windows at the same position.
If bottom lock is displayed with the scrolling fishfinder image, the crosshair lines appear in bottom lock window but not in the scrolling fishfinder window.
➤
To switch the VRM on, or re-position an off-screen VRM:
1. Press VRM/EBL .
The VRM is displayed in its last-used position.
The cursor is positioned at the center of the crosshair and has control of the
VRM, as indicated by four-way arrow, the solid crosshair and the text VRM .
2. Use the trackpad to position the center of the crosshair over the desired object. The depth and distance-from-boat are updated as you move the cursor.
3. Press ENTER to drop the VRM. The crosshair is displayed as a dashed line.
➤
To move a VRM:
1. Move the cursor over the VRM you wish to change then press ENTER .
The cursor is positioned at the center of the crosshair and has control of the
VRM, as indicated by four-way arrow, the solid crosshair and the text VRM .
2. Use the trackpad to move the cursor and VRM to the desired position.
3. Press ENTER to drop the VRM, or CLEAR to abandon the operation and return the VRM to its previous position.
➤
To switch the VRM off:
Press VRM/EBL . The VRM is switched off.
or
81213_1.book Page 11 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 6: Sonar Operations 6-11
VRM
Move the cursor over the VRM, until the text VRM appears, then press
CLEAR .
6.5 Waypoints
MARKS
The MARKS key lets you to place up to 998 waypoints. A waypoint is a position, normally entered on a chart as a reference, or as a place to go to.
However, units with Raychart functionality (L770DRC Plus and L1260DRC
Plus) let you place waypoints in Sonar mode as well as Chartplotter mode.
Note: You can only place a waypoint in Sonar mode if you have valid position data from a GPS.
Waypoints are described fully in Chapter 7 . This section provides details that are specific to placing Waypoints in Sonar mode.
A waypoint can be placed at the cursor position or at the vessel’s current position; this is sometimes known as an event mark. All waypoints placed on the Fishfinder are stored in a waypoint database list with position, depth and temperature when it was placed.
Waypoints placed on the Fishfinder are displayed as a solid vertical line on the scrolling bottom, Zoom and Bottom Lock displays. The waypoint number is shown at the top of the vertical line. The waypoint scrolls to the left with the scrolling bottom display.
If you place a waypoint at the cursor position in Sonar mode and a chart window is open, the waypoint is displayed on the chart. You can GOTO, EDIT and ERASE a cursor waypoint.
Note: When in chart mode, if you place a waypoint at the cursor position, it is not shown on the Fishfinder display.
If you place a waypoint at the vessel position in Sonar mode it is shown in the chart window.
Placing a Waypoint
➤
To access the place waypoint soft keys, press MARKS :
MARKS
PLACE WPT
AT CURSOR
PLACE WPT
AT VESSEL
WAYPOINT
LIST
LOAD/SAVE
USER CARD
D4169-2
81213_1.book Page 12 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
6-12 HD Series Fishfinders
MARKS
WAYPOINT
LIST
➤
To place a waypoint at the cursor position or at the vessel position:
1. Press either the PLACE WPT AT CURSOR or the PLACE WPT AT VESSEL soft key. The waypoint is added to the waypoint list and tagged using the next available number.
2. Press CLEAR or ENTER to remove the place waypoint soft keys.
➤
To create a waypoint as latitude/longitude using the Waypoint List:
1. Press MARKS , followed by the WAYPOINT LIST soft key.
The Waypoint List and associated soft keys are displayed.
WAYPOINT LIST
SYMBOL NAME
WAYPOINT 001
WAYPOINT 002
WAYPOINT 003
WAYPOINT 004
WAYPOINT 005
POSITION
BRG _186°
TEMP ---°
C
DATE --/--/--
50°21^966N
001°20^368W
RNG _21.0nm
DEPTH
--m
TIME --:--:--
MAKE NEW
WAYPOINT
GOTO
WAYPOINT
EDIT
WAYPOINT
MAKE NEW
WAYPOINT
WAYPOINT
TRANSFER
D4262-2
2. Press the MAKE NEW WAYPOINT soft key followed by LAT/LONG .
The WPT POSITION (LAT/LONG) screen is displayed, with its associated soft keys. The waypoint is placed at the current vessel position, or if not available, the cursor position.
3. You can use the soft keys to edit the waypoint position.
It is added to the Waypoint List and named with the next available number.
To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER or CLEAR twice.
81213_1.book Page 13 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 6: Sonar Operations 6-13
➤
To GOTO a cursor waypoint see
Going To an Individual Target Point
on
page 7-33
.
➤
To ERASE a cursor waypoint see
Erasing a Waypoint
on
page 7-15
.
6.6 MOB
MARKS
If you lose a person or object overboard and need to return to the location, you should use the Man Overboard (MOB) function.
You can select the type of data used for the MOB position using the set up menus (see Section 4.3
).
Note: To obtain MOB position, you need either of the following:
• Position data from a GPS or equivalent device
• Heading and speed data, so that the position can be calculated by dead reckoning
➤
To initiate the MOB procedure, press and hold the MARKS key for two seconds. The system then performs the following tasks automatically:
• Marks the Fishfinder image with a vertical line and the letters MOB .
• Marks the current position on the chart display with a MOB symbol .
• Displays the MOB data box, which shows the bearing and distance from your vessel to the MOB waypoint position and the elapsed time since the
MOB was initiated ( Figure 6-3 ).
• Sounds a 4-second alarm pattern every 30 seconds.
• Sends an MOB message (including bearing and distance) to other units in the system, via the SeaTalk connection.
MOB 60
80
MOB data box
MOB
RNG 0.33
nm
BRG 162° T
00:05:24
FREQUENCY
POSITION
N 43°04^76
W070°44^83
ZOOM BTM.LOCK
100
A-SCOPE
D6188-1
Figure 6-3: MOB Display
MOB position
81213_1.book Page 14 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
6-14 HD Series Fishfinders
MARKS
➤
To cancel the MOB, press and hold the MARKS key for 2 seconds.
The MOB symbol and data box are removed.
Note: The MOB procedure can also be initiated or cancelled if the appropriate SeaTalk message is received by the display unit.
81213_1.book Page 1 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-1
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations
7.1 Introduction
This chapter explains how to navigate using the chart functions that are available with the L770DRC Plus and L1260DRC Plus Combined Fishfinder/
Chartplotter units. Chart functions are also available on L770D Plus and
L1260D Plus fishfinder-only units, when connected to an hsb 2 Plus Series device with chartplotter functionality (see Section 2.9, Integrated Systems ).
This chapter covers the following topics:
• Using chart cards
• Controlling waypoints, including placing, moving, editing and deleting waypoints
• Working with routes, including creating a new route, managing routes using the route database and editing routes
• Following routes and going to waypoints
• Transferring Waypoints and Routes
• Using tracks, including showing tracks, track set up and saving tracks
All these chart functions are available in plotter mode, so you can plot and track routes at large scales even when a chart card is not installed.
Further functions, including measuring distances and setting alarms are described in Chapter 8 .
Safety
The chartplotter makes it very easy to place a waypoint and travel towards it.
However, you should always check first that the route is safe. If you are using the chartplotter in combination with a SeaTalk autopilot, the autopilot will prompt for confirmation before it steers the vessel towards the waypoint.
If you have entered your route using a small-scale chart, zoom in to a larger scale to check for hazards, such as small shoals, that may not be shown on the smaller scale charts.
Note: Until you are familiar with interpreting the chart display, you should take every opportunity to compare the displayed objects with visual targets, such as buoys and coastal structures. You should practice harbor and coastal navigation during daylight and in clear weather conditions.
81213_1.book Page 2 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-2 HD Series Fishfinders
WARNING:
The equipment should not be used as a substitute for good navigational practice nor for official government paper charts.
7.2 Using Chart Cards
The chartplotter has a built-in world map. Most areas are displayed on a scale of 4000 nm from the top to the bottom of the screen and can be zoomed in to
150 nm.
To use the chartplotter as a navigation aid, charts with detailed information for the area you wish to navigate are required. The charts are available on C-MAP
NT and NT+ electronic chart cards (C-Cards), each of which can store as many as 20 charts in an electronic format. A single C-MAP chart normally provides as much information as is available in paper charts for that geographic area and can be displayed down to a range of 1/64 nm on the screen if the data is available.
Two card slots are provided on the display unit. Chart data from both slots can be downloaded.
The chart scale in use is indicated in the status bar - the number represents the distance (in nautical miles) displayed from the top of the screen to the bottom of the screen.
Note: You can remove and insert cards while a chart is displayed. The chart information is retained on-screen until the chartplotter redraws the screen
(for example: when you pan outside the current area or use the
RANGE
key to change the chart scale).
Inserting a Chart Card
➤
To insert a chart card:
1. Check that the card is a C-MAP NT or NT+ C-Card with the desired chart stored on it.
2. Open the card cover, at the lower left of the display front panel.
3. Hold the card with the title label towards the left, as shown in the illustration.
4. Gently push the card into one of the two slots. The card will only go in if it is correctly oriented. Push the card in as far as it will go, then move it to the right so that the top is under the retaining pegs. The card will be held in place by the pegs.
5. Close the card cover until it clicks shut, to prevent water entering the display unit.
81213_1.book Page 3 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-3
D4158-2
Figure 7-1: Inserting the Chart Card
Removing a Chart Card
➤
To remove a chart card:
1. Open the card cover, at the lower left of the display front panel.
2. Press on the card you wish to remove and move the top of the card to the left to clear the retaining pegs.
The card will spring half-way out, enabling you to grip the card and remove it from the slot.
3. Remember to close the card cover so that it clicks shut, to prevent water from entering the card reader assembly.
Displaying the Chart Data
The new chart information will be displayed when you move the cursor into an area covered by the new chart or, if it is already in the area, change the range scale.
If an hsb 2 Plus Series repeater display is connected, the chart can also be accessed by the repeater display. To see the chart you may need to zoom or pan, to redraw the chart area to the screen.
The boundary of each chart digitized in the current card is defined by a box or rectangle. (You can switch off the chart boundaries display if you wish, as part of the chartplotter set up described in Section 4.5
.)
81213_1.book Page 4 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-4 HD Series Fishfinders
RANGE
➤
To zoom in:
1. Use the trackpad to move the cursor inside one of the chart boxes and press the lower part of the RANGE key.
That area is expanded, with the cursor at the center, so that you can see more detail. Note that the smaller the chart box is on the screen, the further you can zoom in and the greater the amount of detail that is available.
If you have switched on Plotter Mode (see Section 4.5
), you can zoom in further than the most detailed chart; all chart functions remain available.
Displaying Chart Object and Source Information
Chart cards include a number of displayed objects for which information is available, such as lights and buoys. They also contain additional source data for structures, lines, open sea areas etc. You can use the context-sensitive cursor to identify (in a pop-up box) an object or chart position and you can obtain detailed information for the selected item.
Set up options let you specify when an identification pop-up is displayed.
Three options are available:
• Display a pop-up for all objects and source data automatically when the cursor is over the object symbol or source area.
• Display a pop-up for displayed objects when the cursor is over the symbol.
• Do not display the identification pop-ups.
The chartplotter also provides information for the nearest waypoint, port facility, tide station, wreck or obstruction for a selected position. If your chart includes port and tide data, this can be displayed.
➤
To identify an item and obtain detailed information:
1. Move the cursor over the symbol or chart position for which you require the information. If specified in Chart Set Up, a pop-up box such as the following is displayed at the lower left or upper right corner of the screen:
1 Object
FAIRWAY BN Bn Safe Water RW
LFI.W.10s7m5M
D4260-2
2. To view detailed information, press ENTER . The details available are listed on-screen in an object information pop-up.
The pop-up is split into two windows: objects are listed in the upper window and details for the selected object are provided in the lower window.
Use the trackpad to select an object in the upper window and use the soft keys to scroll up or down the detailed information in the lower window.
81213_1.book Page 5 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-5
3. Press CLEAR to remove the pop-up from the screen and return to the default display.
Port Area
At large chart scales port area information is indicated by the symbol . An object information pop-up provides the name of the marina or port and a list of the facilities available.
Where available, details for each facility can be displayed. This information includes items such as accommodation, slip sizes, fueling, sanitation, electrical or other maintenance services provided, VHF channels monitored, and other safety and navigation information.
In some areas the chart shows symbols for individual facilities. The facilities and their associated symbols are illustrated in Figure 7-2 .
Figure 7-2: Port Symbols
81213_1.book Page 6 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-6 HD Series Fishfinders
Tide Data
The symbol indicates tide height data is available for that position on the chart. When you select the tide height option, a graph of predictions for maximum and minimum tide heights is displayed, data for sunrise and sunset is also provided as illustrated Figure 7-3 .
Note: The predictions available are sufficiently accurate under moderate weather conditions, for the coastal areas served by the reference station, to be used for navigation planning. However, certain weather fronts and storms can alter tidal patterns and influence predicted times and heights.
The cursor, represented by a dotted vertical line on the graph, is used to select a time for which the tide height is displayed.
You can use the soft keys and trackpad to change the date for which tide information is shown.
24nm
CSR N 43°04^84
POS W070°44^83
PORTSMOUTH, N.H.
8.50
7.05
5.60
4.15
2.70
1.25
-0.20
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24
CURSOR
TIME 05:37am
HEIGHT 1.41ft
SELECTED DATE
05/14/2000
SUNRISE/SUNSET
TWILIGHT 0805
SUNRISE 0919
SUNSET 2359
TWILIGHT ----
HIGH/LOW WATER
HIGH 0040 8.46ft
LOW 0700 0.10ft
HIGH 1310 8.43ft
LOW 1930 -0.20ft
SET DATE PREV. DAY TODAY NEXT DAY
D5035-1
Figure 7-3: Tide Data
➤
To select a time, use the trackpad to move the cursor to the desired time.
81213_1.book Page 7 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-7
➤
To change the day press PREV. DAY, DAY or TODAY , as required. Alternatively, you can press SET DAY . To change date, use the trackpad to move the cursor left/ right to select the character and up/down to increase/decrease the value.
The graph and tide data will be updated accordingly.
Nearest
You can obtain information for the eight nearest waypoints, port services, ports, tide stations, wrecks, or obstructions for a selected position. The chartplotter also provides options to redraw the chart with a selected item at the center, Goto a waypoint and display a list of all the port on the chart card.
➤
To obtain the information for the nearest objects:
1. Move the cursor to the desired position, and then press ENTER to display the object information pop-up.
2. Press the NEAREST soft key. The Find Nearest pop-up list is displayed.
Use the trackpad to highlight the desired object, and then press ENTER . i. For port services the port service symbols are displayed. Use the trackpad to highlight the desired service, and then press ENTER .
If you select a port then press ENTER , detailed information for the service at that port are displayed. Typical port data is shown in Figure 7-4 .
D4255_1
Figure 7-4: Nearest Port - Typical Data ii. For all other items, the eight nearest objects are listed with distance and bearing.
81213_1.book Page 8 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-8 HD Series Fishfinders
Soft keys provide you with options to EXPAND port, wreck and obstructions data; view a FULL LIST of ports detailed on the chart card; SHOW TIDE data; GOTO a waypoint; and FIND the object (redraw the chart with the object at the center). Use the trackpad to highlight an object, then press the desired soft key.
3. To return to the default display, press CLEAR to back-track through the pop-up lists.
7.3 Working with Waypoints
Introduction
The Chartplotter enables you to place up to 998 waypoints. (Waypoint number
999 is used for MOB operation.) A waypoint is a position entered on a chart as a reference, or as a place to go to. All waypoints placed on the chartplotter are stored in a waypoint database list, which includes symbol, position, bearing, range and additional data. All waypoints in the database are displayed on the screen, unless you set waypoint display off in the Chart Set Up menu, as described in Chapter 4 . You can select a waypoint, either on-screen or from the list, for editing.
A waypoint can be placed at the cursor position or at the vessel’s current position (sometimes known as an event mark). A waypoint at the vessel position includes additional information (if available) on the depth and temperature when it was placed. Alternatively, you can manually enter
Waypoints as either Lat/Long coordinates or Loran TDs which are automatically converted into Lat/Long coordinates. All waypoints can be included in a route. You can place waypoints, using simulator mode, before you install the chartplotter on your vessel.
Note: Radar marks may also be displayed on the screen if your chartplotter is part of an integrated system with a radar display. These are screen annotations - you cannot go to marks, nor can they be included in routes.
When you place a new waypoint, it is displayed using the default symbol of a cross (unless you have changed the symbol in Chart Set Up). The waypoint is added to the waypoint list and tagged with the next available number. You can use the edit functions to change the symbol and name. When the cursor is positioned over a waypoint, the waypoint bearing and range are displayed.
Waypoints in the current route are available on other SeaTalk instruments that support current route transfer (for example: another hsb 2 Plus Series
Chartplotter or the ST80 Masterview). You can also transfer waypoints between the chartplotter and other NMEA or SeaTalk instruments using the
Waypoint Transfer functions.
81213_1.book Page 9 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-9
This section explains how to perform the following tasks using the on-screen cursor and the waypoint list:
• Placing a Waypoint
• Selecting a Waypoint
• Displaying Waypoint data
• Editing a Waypoint (symbol, name & position)
• Erasing a Waypoint
• Moving a Waypoint
At the end is a section about using the ST80 Navigator Keypad to select, edit, and name your waypoints.
Placing a Waypoint
MARKS
The scenario Place and Goto a Waypoint on page 7-44 provides a simple example of how to place a waypoint.
➤
To access the place waypoint soft keys, press MARKS :
PLACE WPT
AT CURSOR
PLACE WPT
AT VESSEL
WAYPOINT
LIST
LOAD/SAVE
USER CARD
PLACE WPT
AT CURSOR
PLACE WPT
AT VESSEL
D5572-1
➤
To place a waypoint at the cursor position or at the vessel position:
1. Press either the PLACE WPT AT CURSOR or the PLACE WPT AT VESSEL soft key. The waypoint is added to the waypoint list and tagged using the next available number.
The waypoint soft keys are displayed until you move the cursor away from the waypoint or press CLEAR .
GOTO
WAYPOINT
EDIT
WAYPOINT
ERASE
WAYPOINT
MOVE
WAYPOINT
MARKS
D4163-1
You can use the EDIT WAYPOINT soft key to name the waypoint as described in Editing Waypoints below.
2. Press CLEAR or ENTER to remove the place waypoint soft keys.
➤
To place a waypoint as latitude/longitude using the Waypoint List:
1. Press MARKS , followed by the WAYPOINT LIST soft key. The Waypoint List and associated soft keys are displayed.
WAYPOINT
LIST
81213_1.book Page 10 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-10 HD Series Fishfinders
WAYPOINT LIST
SYMBOL NAME
WAYPOINT 001
WAYPOINT 002
WAYPOINT 003
WAYPOINT 004
WAYPOINT 005
POSITION
BRG _186°
TEMP ---°
C
DATE --/--/--
50°21^966N
001°20^368W
RNG _21.0nm
DEPTH
--m
TIME --:--:--
MAKE NEW
WAYPOINT
GOTO
WAYPOINT
EDIT
WAYPOINT
MAKE NEW
WAYPOINT
WAYPOINT
TRANSFER
D4262-2
2. Press the MAKE NEW WAYPOINT soft key followed by the LAT/LONG soft key.
The WPT POSITION (LAT/LONG) screen is displayed, with it’s associated soft keys. The waypoint is placed at the current vessel position, or if not available, the cursor position.
3. You can use the soft keys to edit the waypoint position as described in Editing the Waypoint Details on page 7-13 .
It is added to the Waypoint List and named with the next available number.
To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER or CLEAR twice.
➤
To place a waypoint as Loran TDs using the Waypoint List:
1. Press MARK , followed by the WAYPOINT LIST soft key.
The Waypoint List and associated soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the MAKE NEW WAYPOINT , the waypoint is placed at the current vessel position, or if not available, the cursor position. To change the position press the LORAN TDs soft key
The WPT POSITION (LORAN TDs) screen is displayed, with it’s associated soft key:
81213_1.book Page 11 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations
WPT POSITION (LORAN TDs)
CHAIN 6731 - NELS Lessay
SLAVES Y - Z (24 -39)
TD 1 29138.0
TD 2 44713.8
ASF 1 +0.0
ASF 2 +0.0
7-11
CHAIN ASF1/ASF2 SET TD 1 SET TD 2
D5591-1
Note: You can enter waypoints as Loran TDs which are converted to Lat/
Long coordinates. However, although the waypoint is shown in both Lat/
Long and Loran TDs in the Waypoint List, you can subsequently only edit the position as Lat/Long coordinates. TD entries in the Waypoint List are shown only for those waypoints which were entered as TDs.
3. Edit the Loran parameters as desired, using: i. The CHAIN soft key, which enables selection of both the Chain and it’s
Slave:
WPT POSITION (LORAN TDs)
CHAIN 6731 - NELS Lessay
SLAVES Y - Z (24 -39)
TD 1 29138.0
TD 2 44713.8
ASF 1 +0.0
ASF 2 +0.0
SELECT CHAIN SELECT SLAVES
D5592-1 ii. The ASF1/ASF2 soft key, which presents two soft keys for editing ASF 1 and ASF 2 parameters independently :
SET ASF 1 SET ASF 2
D5593-1 iii. The SET TD 1 and SET TD 2 soft keys, which enable editing of each TD’s parameters independently.
81213_1.book Page 12 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-12 HD Series Fishfinders
Note: Except for the CHAIN setting, parameters are edited using the trackpad as described in Editing the Waypoint Details on page 7-13.
4. When editing is complete, press the ENTER key to save the waypoint or
CLEAR to cancel the operation.
The display returns to the New Waypoint screen.
Press the ENTER or CLEAR to return to the Waypoint List.
Selecting a Waypoint
WPT
Positioning the cursor over a waypoint selects that waypoint and accesses the waypoint soft keys. These keys enable you to GOTO (described in Section 7.5
),
EDIT (symbol, name, position), ERASE or MOVE the waypoint.
Selecting a waypoint from the List enables you to GOTO and EDIT (symbol, name, position, erase) the waypoint. The Waypoint List also provides options to make a new waypoint and transfer waypoints.
➤
To select a waypoint using the cursor:
1. Move the cursor over the waypoint, until the letters WPT are displayed.
The Waypoint Data box (see Waypoint Data Display on page 7-13 ) and the following soft keys are displayed:
GOTO
WAYPOINT
EDIT
WAYPOINT
ERASE
WAYPOINT
MOVE
WAYPOINT
MARKS
WAYPOINT
LIST
D4163-1
The selected waypoint can be edited via these soft keys.
➤
To select a waypoint using the Waypoint List:
1. Press MARKS , followed by the WAYPOINT LIST soft key.
The Waypoint List and associated soft keys are displayed.
The list details all waypoints in alpha-numeric order. The selected waypoint is indicated by the selection bar; its position, bearing and range are provided.
2. Use the trackpad to move the selection bar up and down the list to highlight the desired waypoint.
or
Use the ST80 Navigator to select to highlight the desired waypoint, as described in Using the ST60 or ST80 Navigator Keypad on page 7-16 .
The selected waypoint can be edited via the soft keys displayed.
81213_1.book Page 13 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-13
Waypoint Data Display
Waypoint data can be viewed in two ways: you can use the context-sensitive cursor to select the waypoint and thus display the waypoint data box, or you can view waypoint details on the waypoint list.
Note: To permanently display the target waypoint data box, select it in the System Set Up menu (see Section 4.3) and use the
SCREEN
soft key to switch data boxes on.
➤
To display the waypoint data box, move the cursor over the waypoint.
The waypoint data box is displayed, this indicates waypoint number/name, bearing and range (or latitude and longitude if selected in the system set up menu).
MARKS
WAYPOINT
LIST
WAYPOINT 001
BRG 191 o T
RNG 2.2nm
D4250-1
While the cursor is over the waypoint, the waypoint soft keys are displayed.
➤
To remove the waypoint data box and soft keys either:
Move the cursor away from the waypoint, or press CLEAR .
➤
To display the waypoint details from the waypoint list:
Select the waypoint in the list as described above.
The details for the selected waypoint are displayed in the lower half of the window. Temperature, depth, date and time are included (if available) for waypoints placed at the vessel position.
To remove the Waypoint List and return to the default soft key display, press
CLEAR twice.
Editing the Waypoint Details
EDIT
WAYPOINT
You can change the name, symbol and position of any waypoint.
➤
To edit a waypoint:
1. Select the waypoint, using the cursor or the waypoint list, as previously described. The waypoint soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the EDIT WAYPOINT soft key. The Edit Waypoint soft keys are displayed:
SYMBOL NAME POSITION
3. To edit the symbol, press the SYMBOL soft key.
D4166-1
81213_1.book Page 14 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-14 HD Series Fishfinders
Use the soft keys, shown in the following illustration, to highlight the desired symbol, then press ENTER to confirm the selection.
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the default soft keys.
EDIT
WAYPOINT
SELECT SYMBOL
D4178-1
4. To edit the waypoint name, press the NAME soft key. The NAME WAYPOINT window is displayed.
Using the trackpad to edit the name: iv. Use the left or right side of the trackpad to move the cursor to the character you wish to change.
v. Then use the top or bottom of the trackpad to scroll through the characters.
Using the ST80 Navigator Keypad to edit the name: i. Use the left or right arrows of the Navigator’s keypad to move the cursor to the character you wish to change.
ii. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the characters.
or
Use the alphanumeric keypad to change the character, as described in
Using the ST60 or ST80 Navigator Keypad on page 7-16
When you have finished editing the name, to remove the window, press
ENTER to save the name or CLEAR to cancel the operation. The waypoint name replaces the waypoint number.
Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the default soft keys.
5. To edit the waypoint position, press the EDIT WAYPOINT soft key, followed by POSITION . The Waypoint Position pop-up is displayed.
Use the soft keys to select LAT, LON, BRG or RNG .
Using the trackpad to edit the value: i. Use the left or right side of the trackpad to move the cursor to the character you wish to change.
ii. Use the top or bottom of the trackpad to scroll through the characters.
iii. Adjust each parameter until the waypoint position is correct.
Using the ST80 Navigator Keypad to edit the value: i. Use the left or right arrows of the Navigator’s trackpad to move the cursor to the character you wish to change.
ii. Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the characters.
81213_1.book Page 15 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-15 or
Use the alphanumeric keypad to change the character. Press the def/2 key for East, mn/5 for North, rst/7 for South, and uvw/8 for West.
iii. Adjust each parameter until the waypoint position is correct.
When you have finished editing the position, press ENTER to save the position or CLEAR to cancel the operation.
Press ENTER or CLEAR again, the Waypoint Position window is removed from the screen and the default soft keys are displayed.
Erasing a Waypoint
WPT
ERASE
WAYPOINT
You cannot erase the target waypoint or waypoints that are used in routes.
However, you can remove a waypoint from the current route - see Editing a
Route on page 7-28 .
If you try to erase a waypoint that is used in a saved route you are warned
“WAYPOINT IS USED IN A ROUTE & CANNOT BE DELETED”
➤
To delete a waypoint using the cursor:
1. Move the cursor over the waypoint, until the letters WPT are displayed. The waypoint soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the ERASE WAYPOINT soft key. The waypoint is removed from the screen and the Waypoint List is updated.
Note: If you have stopped a GOTO (see Stop Follow or Stop Goto on page 7-34), the target waypoint remains displayed as a target. You need to use the
CLEAR GOTO
soft key before you can erase the waypoint using the cursor.
➤
To delete a waypoint using the waypoint list:
MARKS
WAYPOINT
LIST
1. Select the waypoint from the waypoint list as previously described. The waypoint list soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the EDIT WAYPOINT soft key, followed by ERASE WAYPOINT . The waypoint is removed from the screen and the waypoint list is updated.
Moving a Waypoint
You can move any waypoint except the target waypoint (the waypoint you are following). You can use the Waypoint soft keys and cursor to move the selected waypoint, or you can edit the waypoint position.
WARNING:
Take care when editing waypoints as it is possible to move waypoints that are used in routes stored in the Route Database. List.
81213_1.book Page 16 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-16 HD Series Fishfinders
➤
To move a waypoint using the cursor:
WPT
MOVE
WAYPOINT
1. Move the cursor over the waypoint, until the letters WPT are displayed. The waypoint soft keys are displayed.
2. Press MOVE WAYPOINT , the cursor changes to a four-headed arrow.
3. Move the cursor to the desired waypoint position.
Press ENTER to set the position and return to normal cursor control.
Press CLEAR to cancel the operation.
➤
To move a waypoint using the Waypoint Edit functions:
1. Select the waypoint using either the cursor or the waypoint list as described above. The waypoint soft keys are displayed.
2. To edit the waypoint position proceed as previously described in Editing the Waypoint Details on page 7-13 .
Using the ST60 or ST80 Navigator Keypad
If you have an ST60 or ST80 Navigator Keypad connected on SeaTalk it can be used to name or edit your waypoints, tracks, or routes on any display in the system. The keypad can also be used to select entries in the Waypoint List. The
Navigator provides 10 dedicated alphanumeric keys, a multidirectional cursor control pad, plus Insert and Delete keys.
Note: When using the Navigator Keypad, you should be aware that it can control several displays simultaneously. Any display in edit mode (that is, ready for alpha-numeric data entry) will be affected by the Navigator Keypad.
1 abc
4 jkl
7 rst ins
2 def
5 mn
8 uvw
0
3 ghi
6 opq
9 xyz del
NAVIGATOR
D1934-3
Figure 7-5: ST60/ST80 Navigator Keypad
Most of the alphanumeric keys are used to input multiple characters. Each time you press one of these keys in succession, the next character on that key is input. For example, each press of the 1 key alternately inputs A, B, C, then 1.
81213_1.book Page 17 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-17
The Navigator’s arrow keys function much like the fishfinder’s trackpad, enabling you to move the cursor position or input alpha, numeric, or special characters ( . , - / ‘ & ).
The ins key functions the same as the ENTER key on fishfinder and del inserts a space during edit mode.
Selecting an Entry in the Waypoint List
The Navigator can be used to select an existing item in the Waypoint List. This can be accomplished using the arrow or alphanumeric keys.
➤
To select an existing item in the Waypoint List:
1. Use the up and down arrow keys to move the selection bar up and down the list to highlight the desired entry, just as you would with the fishfinder’s trackpad. or
Press the alphanumeric key that contains the first letter or number of the desired waypoint name. The selection bar moves to the entry starting with that letter or number.
If more than one entry begins with that character, the selection bar moves to the first one in the list. Each time the same key is pressed, the selection bar moves to the entry starting with the next character on the key. If no entry exists for that character, the entry starting with the nearest previous character is selected. If the numeric value of the key is input when no numeric entry exists, the selection bar moves to the first alpha entry.
For example, let’s say we have four waypoints named ORION,
POLARIS, QUANTUM, and 6-GUN. Pressing the opq/6 key four successive times would select the waypoints ORION (O), POLARIS (P),
QUANTUM (Q), then 6-GUN (6). However, pressing the rst/7 key four successive times would select QUANTUM for the first three key presses because entries beginning with the associated letters do not exist and Q is the next previous beginning letter. The fourth press of the rst/7 key would select 6-GUN because no entries begin with a 7 and 6 is the next previous beginning number.
2. Use the ins key like the fishfinder’s ENTER key, to close the Waypoint
List.
The del key and left and right arrow keys do not function in select mode.
81213_1.book Page 18 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-18 HD Series Fishfinders
Editing Entries in the Waypoint, Route, or Track Lists
You can also use the ST80 Navigator Keypad to edit an existing item or to name a new item in the Waypoint List, Route List, or Track List. You first must enter the edit mode for the list you want to modify. Methods for editing each list are described in the respective sections of this chapter.
➤
To edit an item in a list using the Navigator:
1. If necessary, use the right and left arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired character position.
2. Press an alphanumeric key until the desired character is displayed. Each time you press one of these keys in succession, the next character on that key is input.
or
Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll through the list of alpha, numeric, and special characters until the desired character is displayed
(just as you would with the fishfinder’s trackpad). Note that you must use this method to input special characters; they are not available using the alphanumeric keys.
Use the del key to insert a space, if required.
3. Use the arrow keys and alphanumeric keys to input the remainder of the characters required to complete the editing.
4. When done, press the ins key to enter your changes.
7.4 Working with Routes
A route is made up of a series of waypoints (maximum 50). To make a route you place a series of waypoints on the chart.
When a route is created it becomes the current route and is displayed onscreen. The current route is maintained when you power-off. Only one route can be current and is displayed (if it is in the field-of-view) as solid lines connecting waypoints. If you are following the route, the current leg is shown as a dotted line and previous legs are removed from the screen (although the waypoints remain displayed). The current route (and its waypoints) is transferred via SeaTalk to a repeater chart display and other instruments. You can also use the Waypoint Transfer functions to transfer the route database to a repeater display.
Once you have created a route you can use the GOTO soft keys to follow the route. In addition, the GOTO default soft key provides various options as described in Section 7.5
.
81213_1.book Page 19 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-19
Up to 20 routes can be saved in the route database. You can then select a route from the database list as the current route.
The current route can be edited by adding and moving waypoints. The current route is always placed in the database list as route number 0, so you can edit the current route without affecting the original route in the database. Once a route has been saved, options are also provided to name a route, erase a route and to display route details.
You can use the route information to review your passage plan by adjusting the planned Speed Over Ground (SOG).
Note: The route database is stored locally, in the display unit on which it was created. Although the current route is automatically transferred, you need to use the
WAYPOINT TRANSFER
function, described in Section 7.6, to transfer the complete route database to a repeater display connected via hsb 2 .
Also, it is possible for the current route to be overwritten by a route from another unit on an integrated system, so it is advisable to save all routes.
This section explains how to perform the following tasks:
ROUTE
• Creating a new route.
• Saving the current route in the database list.
• Clearing the current route.
• Retrieving a route from the database list as the current route.
• Displaying route information, including the route leg data and waypoint details. Use the waypoint details to review your passage plans for different speeds.
• Using the database list to erase and name existing routes.
• Editing a route by adding, removing and moving waypoints.
➤
To access the route soft keys, press the default soft key ROUTE :
MAKE
ROUTE
EDIT
ROUTE
CLEAR
ROUTE MORE!
D4167-1A
Creating a New Route
Note: If there is a current route, it is cleared when you select
MAKE ROUTE
. If you are following the current route you are prompted to
STOP FOLLOW
. Press the
YES
soft key to continue, or
NO
to abandon route creation. If the route has not been saved you are prompted to save it.
The chart scenario Make and Follow a Route on page 7-46 provides a simple example of how to create a route.
81213_1.book Page 20 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-20 HD Series Fishfinders
ROUTE
MAKE
ROUTE
You can edit a route after you have finished making it, as described in Editing a Route on page 7-28 .
➤
To make a new route by placing waypoints:
Note: You can pan the chart and change the scale while placing waypoints.
1. If necessary, move the cursor to the area in which you wish to make the route and select a suitable chart scale.
2. Press the ROUTE soft key, then press the MAKE ROUTE soft key. The make route soft keys are displayed:
PLACE
WAYPOINT
UNDO
WAYPOINT
ACCEPT
ROUTE
USE
WPT LIST
PLACE
WAYPOINT
PLACE
WAYPOINT
UNDO
WAYPOINT
ACCEPT
ROUTE
D5575-1
3. Move the cursor to the position on the chart where you want your first waypoint to be. Press the PLACE WAYPOINT soft key.
Note: You can position the cursor on an existing waypoint – the text
WPT
indicates you are re-using the waypoint rather than placing a new one. This waypoint is included in the route when you press
PLACE WAYPOINT
.
The waypoint appears on the screen at the cursor position. The number displayed alongside the waypoint identifies its position in the route. The new waypoint is temporarily added to the waypoint list with the first available waypoint number. The waypoints in the current route are re-numbered to identify the new positions.
Note: If you Clear the route before it is Saved, the waypoint is removed.
4. Move the cursor to the next waypoint position. A dotted line connects the cursor to the last placed waypoint.
5. Press PLACE WAYPOINT again. The waypoint is placed and the dotted line changes to a solid line.
If you placed the waypoint incorrectly, you can delete the last-placed waypoint by pressing the UNDO WAYPOINT soft key.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have placed all your waypoints. You can have up to 50 waypoints in a route.
7. When you have entered all your waypoints, either:
Press the ACCEPT ROUTE soft key (or ENTER ) to complete the route. Your route is displayed on the screen and is the current route, but it is not active.
The first waypoint of a new route is outlined with a square, indicating that it will be the target waypoint when the route is activated. If selected, the waypoint data box is displayed for the target waypoint.
81213_1.book Page 21 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-21
ROUTE
➤
To make a new route using the Waypoint List:
1. Press the ROUTE soft key. The route soft keys are displayed.
MAKE
ROUTE
EDIT
ROUTE
CLEAR
ROUTE MORE!
MAKE
ROUTE
USE
WPT LIST
D4167-1A
2. Press the MAKE ROUTE soft key. The make route soft keys are displayed
PLACE
WAYPOINT
UNDO
WAYPOINT
ACCEPT
ROUTE
USE
WPT LIST
D5575-1
3. Press the USE WPT LIST soft key. The MAKE ROUTE screen is displayed with its associated soft keys.
WAYPOINTS
COWES
GURNARD LEDGE
MAIN CHANNEL
NEEDLES FAIRWAY
PORT SOLENT
50°50^000N
001°06^000W
348° m 2.30
nm
MAKE ROUTE
NEW ROUTE
01 HARBOUR
02 MAIN CHANNEL
03 COWES
04 LYMINGTON
50°52^230N
001°02^390W
300° m 1.00
nm
INSERT
WAYPOINT
INSERT
WAYPOINT
REMOVE
WAYPOINT
ACCEPT
ROUTE
USE
CURSOR
D5574-1
The available Waypoints are listed in the left hand column (alphanumeric).
The right hand column lists the waypoints in the New Route; the number indicates its order in the route. The lower part of the table shows position, bearing and range of the highlighted waypoint.
You use the trackpad left/right to move control between the two columns (the highlighted title indicates the selected column) and the trackpad up/down to scroll through the lists.
4. Select a waypoint from the Waypoint List then go to the New Route column and select a position in the list.
Note: A waypoint cannot be used more than once in a route; those already used are displayed in a lighter shade of gray.
5. Press the INSERT WAYPOINT soft key to place the waypoint below the selected position in the Route. You can have up to 50 waypoints in a route.
81213_1.book Page 22 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-22 HD Series Fishfinders
REMOVE
WAYPOINT
ACCEPT
ROUTE
6. To remove a waypoint from the New Route column, highlight the waypoint and press the REMOVE WAYPOINT soft key.
Note: The
INSERT WAYPOINT
or
REMOVE WAYPOINT
action adds/removes the highlighted waypoint to/from the Route column, regardless of which column is selected.
7. When all waypoints have been entered, press the ACCEPT ROUTE soft key
(or ENTER ) to complete the route.
Note: The completed route is stored in the display unit and will be re-displayed if you turn the unit off then on again. However, on an integrated system it is possible for a current route from another unit to overwrite this route. It is therefore recommended that you save the route, as described in Saving the
Current Route .
Saving the Current Route
You can save up to 20 named routes in the route database list. These routes can then be re-displayed and followed at a later date. When you save the route, all new waypoints are saved in the Waypoint List.
ROUTE
SAVE
ROUTE
Note: If the current route has not been saved, when you attempt an operation that affects this route (for example: CLEAR ROUTE) , you are prompted to save it.
➤
To save and name the current route:
1. To access the SAVE ROUTE soft key, press the ROUTE soft key, followed by
MORE .
2. Press the SAVE ROUTE soft key. The save route pop-up and the NAME ROUTE soft keys are displayed as illustrated in Figure 7-6 .
3. The next available entry on the route list is highlighted.
(If desired, you can use the trackpad to select another position in the list.
This can be a blank slot or an existing route that you no longer require.)
81213_1.book Page 23 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations
SAVE ROUTE
1 EMPTY
2 EMPTY
3 EMPTY
4 EMPTY
5 EMPTY
7-23
NAME ROUTE?
YES NO
D4155-1
Figure 7-6: Save Route Window
4. If you do not wish to name or re-name the route, press the NO soft key to clear the list. The route is saved and is listed as Route Not Named.
5. If you wish to name the route press the YES soft key:
Use the trackpad to move the cursor right or left to the character you wish to edit. Then use the top or bottom of the trackpad to increase or decrease the letter or number.
or
Use the arrow keys and alphanumeric keys on the ST80 Navigator keypad to input or edit the characters, as described in Using the ST60 or ST80
Navigator Keypad on page 7-16 .
6. Press ENTER to finish and clear the Name List, or press CLEAR to cancel the operation. To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER again.
81213_1.book Page 24 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-24 HD Series Fishfinders
Clearing the Current Route
ROUTE
RTE
STOP
FOLLOW
SAVE
ROUTE
You can clear the current route from the screen. When you select CLEAR ROUTE if the current route has not been saved, you have the option of saving it and, if you are following the current route, you have the option to stop.
➤
To clear the current route:
1. Press the ROUTE default soft key or place the cursor over a route leg until the text RTE is displayed.
Press the CLEAR ROUTE soft key.
2. If you are following the current route the STOP FOLLOW soft keys are displayed.
To cancel the CLEAR operation press NO .
To stop following and clear the route press YES .
3. If the route has not been saved the SAVE ROUTE soft keys are displayed.
To clear the route, without saving it in the route database, press NO .
To save the route in the database, press YES . The Name route soft keys are displayed and you should continue as described in the previous section,
Saving the Current Route on page 7-22 .
The current route is cleared from the screen and the default soft keys are displayed. You can now use the ROUTE soft keys to make a route, or to show another route from the database.
Retrieve a Route From the Database
ROUTE
SHOW
ROUTE
You can select a route as the current route from the database list. The list is accessed from the second set of ROUTE soft keys.
➤
To select a route as the current route:
1. Press the ROUTE soft key, followed by MORE , then press ROUTE LIST . The route list is displayed as illustrated in Figure 7-7 . The selection bar indicates the selected route.
2. Use the trackpad to select the desired route then press the SHOW ROUTE soft key. The chart is re-drawn at a scale suitable to display the whole route.
81213_1.book Page 25 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations
ROUTE LIST
CURRENT
1 EMPTY
2 EMPTY
3 EMPTY
4 EMPTY
7-25
SHOW
ROUTE
ERASE
ROUTE
ROUTE
INFO
NAME
ROUTE
D4263-1
Figure 7-7: Route List Window
Displaying Route Information
You can display the following information that relates to your route:
• Route leg or waypoint information, using the context-sensitive cursor.
• Details of waypoints in the route, using the soft keys. You can use this information to review your passage plan.
RTE
Route Leg and Waypoint Information
➤
To display information about a route leg, move the cursor over the leg until the letters RTE are displayed. A Route Leg data box such as the following is displayed.
WPT
ROUTE NO.
ROUTE NAME
LEG 02 - 03
0°T 5.5nm
D4259-2
To remove the data box, move the cursor away from the route or press CLEAR .
➤
To display information about a route waypoint, move the cursor over the waypoint until the letters WPT are displayed. The waypoint data box is displayed; this box includes the route and waypoint number.
To remove the data box, move the cursor away from the route or press CLEAR .
81213_1.book Page 26 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-26 HD Series Fishfinders
Using Route Information to Review Your Passage Plan
You can view data for all the waypoints in the current route, or any saved route.
You select the route from the database list and the information is displayed in a
Route Information pop-up. The following details are provided for each waypoint:
• Position
• Bearing (from previous waypoint)
• Length of leg (from previous waypoint)
• Total Length
• Time (ETA or Elapsed)
ROUTE
ROUTE
INFO
Soft keys are provided to toggle the time between ETA or elapsed and to change the Speed Over Ground (SOG) value. The ETA for each waypoint is calculated using the selected SOG so you can change the SOG to determine its effect on your ETA.
The chart scenario Review Your Passage Plan on page 7-48 provides a simple example of how to use the route information.
➤
To display information about any route in the database:
1. Press the ROUTE soft key, followed by MORE , then press ROUTE LIST . The route list is displayed. The selection bar indicates the selected route.
2. Use the trackpad to select the desired route, then press the ROUTE INFO soft key.
The Route Information pop-up is displayed. As illustrated in Figure 7-8 , this lists the waypoints in the route and details bearing, length of each leg, total distance, and either the estimated time of arrival (ETA) or the elapsed time.
The soft keys enable you to toggle between ETA or total (elapsed) time, and to change the Speed Over Ground (SOG) value used in the time calculations. The current selections are highlighted.
➤
To change the SOG used for ETA calculations:
1. Press one of the PLANNED SOG keys to switch from actual to planned SOG.
2. Press the up or down PLANNED SOG keys to change the planned SOG value.
The Time values in the Route Information list are updated.
3. Press the ACTUAL SOG key to use the actual SOG value rather than a planned one.
81213_1.book Page 27 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations
INFO FOR ROUTE-CURRENT ROUTE
WPT POSITION BRG DISTANCE TOTAL TIME
°T nm nm ETA
01 50°21^97N --- 0.0 0.0 --:--
001°15^80W
02 50°21^97N 090 4.4 4.4 --:--
001°08^75W
03 50°27^48N 000 5.5 10.0 --:--
001°08^75W
7-27
TIME
ETA TOTAL
ACTUAL
SOG
1.0kn
PLANNED SOG
0.0kn
D4264-1
Figure 7-8: Route Information Window
4. Press ENTER to remove the Route Information window, then ENTER or
CLEAR to return to the route soft keys.
5. To return to the default soft key display, press ENTER .
Using the Route List to Erase and Name a Route
ROUTE
ERASE
ROUTE
You can delete a route and you can re-name a route by selecting the route on the route list.
➤
To select a route to delete or re-name:
1. Press the ROUTE soft key, followed by MORE , then press ROUTE LIST . The route list is displayed. The selection bar indicates the selected route.
Press the appropriate soft key – ERASE ROUTE or NAME ROUTE .
2. If you ERASE a route you are prompted to confirm.
Press NO to cancel the operation, then ENTER or CLEAR if you wish to remove the route list.
Press YES to erase the route from the list, then ENTER or CLEAR to remove the route list.
81213_1.book Page 28 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-28 HD Series Fishfinders
NAME
ROUTE
3. If you NAME a route:
Use the trackpad to move the cursor right or left to the character you wish to edit. Then use the top or bottom of the trackpad to increase or decrease the letter or number.
or
Use the arrow keys and alphanumeric keys on the ST80 Navigator keypad to input or edit the characters, as described in Using the ST60 or ST80
Navigator Keypad on page 7-16 .
4. Press ENTER to clear the Name List, or CLEAR to cancel the name then to return to the default soft key display, press ENTER again.
Editing a Route
Once you have created a route, you can edit it by:
• Inserting a Waypoint into the route
• Adding waypoints at the end of the route
• Removing a Waypoint
• Reversing a Route
• Moving a Waypoint as described in Moving a Waypoint on page 7-15
Any changes you make to the route affect only the current route. The current route is always held in position 0 in the database, so you need to Save the route if you want to keep the changes.
Inserting a Waypoint into a Route
RTE
You can use the context-sensitive cursor to insert one or more waypoints in the current route. However, if the route is being followed you cannot insert a waypoint into the current leg.
➤
To insert a new waypoint in the current route:
1. Move the cursor over the route leg into which you wish to insert a waypoint. The letters RTE and the route leg data box are displayed. The Route soft keys are displayed.
2. Press ENTER . The cursor changes to a four-way arrow, controlling a new waypoint. The waypoint is connected to the existing waypoints on either side with a dashed line.
3. Move the new waypoint to the desired position and press ENTER to drop it and return to normal cursor operation, or CLEAR to cancel the operation.
The new waypoint is temporarily added to the waypoint list and named with the first available waypoint number. The waypoints in the current route are renumbered to identify the new positions.
81213_1.book Page 29 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-29
Note: If you Clear the route before it is Saved, the new waypoint is removed.
Adding Waypoints at the End of the Route
ROUTE
EDIT
ROUTE
PLACE
WAYPOINT
UNDO
WAYPOINT
ACCEPT
ROUTE
➤
To add waypoints at the end of the route:
1. Press the ROUTE soft key, followed by the EDIT ROUTE soft key.
The Make Route soft keys are displayed and the cursor is connected to the last-placed waypoint with a dotted line. You can add further waypoints to the route in the same way as for a new route.
2. Move the cursor to the desired location and press PLACE WAYPOINT soft key.
If you place the waypoint in the wrong position, press the UNDO WAYPOINT soft key.
Note: You can
UNDO
waypoints in the original route, not just the new ones.
3. Place as many waypoints as desired and press the ACCEPT ROUTE soft key, the default soft keys are displayed.
Removing a Waypoint from the Route
WPT
REMOVE
WAYPOINT
➤
To remove a waypoint from the current route:
1. Move the cursor over the desired waypoint until the letters WPT are displayed. The waypoint soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the REMOVE WAYPOINT soft key. The waypoint is removed from the route and the route is re-numbered.
Alternatively, you can remove the last waypoint from a route by pressing the
UNDO WAYPOINT soft key, as described above in Adding Waypoints at the
End of the Route on page 7-29 .
If the route has not been saved, the waypoint is erased.
If the route has been saved, the waypoint remains on the screen.
Reversing the Route
ROUTE
REVERSE
ROUTE
➤
To reverse the route, so you can Follow the route back:
1. Either press the ROUTE soft key followed by MORE , or move the cursor over the desired waypoint until the letters RTE are displayed.
The route soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the REVERSE ROUTE soft key. The current route is reversed on the screen.
81213_1.book Page 30 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-30 HD Series Fishfinders
7.5 Following Routes and Going to Points
GOTO
The default soft key GOTO accesses the functions to FOLLOW a route and GOTO a waypoint or cursor. When you select the target destination, the chartplotter calculates bearing, distance and cross track error; this information is passed to a helmsman or autopilot. You can also restart the cross track error (XTE) from the actual vessel position to set XTE to zero at that point.
ROUTE GOTO SCREEN FIND SHIP
D4160-1
When the chartplotter is following a route, the target destination is indicated by a square around the waypoint (or cursor marker) and a dotted line shows the intended track, from your start point or previous waypoint, to the target waypoint.
This section describes the following:
• Follow a route either forwards, or in reverse order
• Target Point Arrival
• Other follow route options, including joining at a selected waypoint, advancing waypoints, and restarting XTE
• Go to an individual point, either an existing waypoint or the cursor
• Stop and Restart Follow/Goto
An alarm is triggered when you approach a waypoint, this section describes what happens when you arrive at waypoints. Chapter 8 describes how to set the alarm.
The chartplotter can also display the vessel’s actual track and the track can be recorded for later display. The Track function is described in the Section 7.7
.
➤
To access the Goto/Follow soft keys, press the default soft key GOTO (the soft keys differ if a follow or goto is already in progress):
GOTO
WAYPOINT
GOTO
CURSOR
FOLLOW
ROUTE
D4171-1
Follow a Route
Note: The current route may have been created on this display, or created on another unit and received on this display via SeaTalk.
If a route has been reversed or if a route on screen was being followed but stopped before completion, the target waypoint – outlined by a square box – may be different to when the route was created.
You should always check the target waypoint before initiating a follow route.
81213_1.book Page 31 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-31
GOTO
FOLLOW
ROUTE
➤
To follow the current route:
1. Press the GOTO default soft key. The Goto/Follow soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the FOLLOW ROUTE soft key.
RTE
FOLLOW
ROUTE
Alternatively, to follow a route:
1. Place the cursor over a route leg until the letters RTE and the route soft keys are displayed then press FOLLOW ROUTE .
Your vessel’s current position becomes the origin and the target waypoint in the current route becomes the active target.
The soft keys change as follows:
STOP
FOLLOW
EDIT
ROUTE
CLEAR
ROUTE
REVERSE
ROUTE
ROUTE
REVERSE
ROUTE
GOTO
D4251_1
These options are described in the following sections.
➤
To follow the current route in reverse:
1. Press the ROUTE default soft key, followed by MORE . The route soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the REVERSE ROUTE soft key. The current route is reversed on the screen. Press ENTER or CLEAR .
3. Press the GOTO default soft key. The Goto/Follow soft keys are displayed.
4. Press the FOLLOW ROUTE soft key.
FOLLOW
ROUTE
The soft keys change as follows:
STOP
FOLLOW
GOTO
CURSOR
RESTART
XTE
WAYPOINT
ADVANCE
RTE
REVERSE
ROUTE
FOLLOW
ROUTE
D4172-1
These options are described in the following sections.
Alternatively:
1. Place the cursor over the route leg until the letters RTE and the route soft keys are displayed. Press REVERSE ROUTE then FOLLOW ROUTE .
Your vessel’s current position becomes the origin and the target waypoint in the current route becomes the active target.
Target Point Arrival
You can set up target alarms (see Section 8.3
) to alert you when the vessel is approaching the target point. The arrival alarm is defined as a circle (not visible on the screen), with a specified radius around the target.
81213_1.book Page 32 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-32 HD Series Fishfinders
The alarm is triggered when either of the following conditions is met:
• The distance to the target point is less than that specified for the arrival alarm.
• Your vessel reaches the closest point of approach to the target (defined by a line passing through the waypoint and perpendicular to the route leg).
➤
To cancel the arrival alarm and go towards the next waypoint in the route:
Press any key.
or
Wait for 10 seconds.
The target becomes the origin, the next waypoint becomes the target point, and the two are connected by a dotted line indicating the current leg. Any previous route leg is removed from the screen, but waypoints remain.
Note: When following a route using a SeaTalk autopilot, the autopilot will not turn to the new waypoint until it is accepted at the autopilot control unit.
Other Follow Route Options
You can use the soft keys to follow a route from a selected waypoint (join a route), or if already following, you can advance to the next waypoint. You can also restart the cross track error, setting the current vessel position as the new origin.
In addition, you can move a selected waypoint as described in Section 7.3
, or remove a waypoint from the route as described in Section 7.4
.
Joining a Route
WPT
FOLLOW
FROM HERE
➤
To start tracking the current route at a selected waypoint:
1. Move the cursor over the desired waypoint until the letters WPT and the waypoint soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the FOLLOW FROM HERE soft key.
Your vessel follows the route, using the selected waypoint as the target point.
3. To return to the default display, move the cursor away from the waypoint or press CLEAR or ENTER .
81213_1.book Page 33 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-33
GOTO
Advancing to a Waypoint
➤
Once you are following a route, you can advance to the next waypoint, even if you have not reached the current target waypoint:
1. If necessary, press the GOTO default soft key to display the Goto/Follow soft keys.
STOP
FOLLOW
GOTO
CURSOR
RESTART
XTE
WAYPOINT
ADVANCE
WAYPOINT
ADVANCE
D4172-1
2. Press the WAYPOINT ADVANCE soft key. The current leg of the route is abandoned and the next waypoint becomes the target. The display is updated to show the new route leg.
Restart Cross Track Error (XTE)
While you are following a route, or going to a target point, you can restart the
XTE. This sets the XTE to zero and moves the origin to the actual vessel position.
GOTO
RESTART
XTE
Restarting XTE is useful if you find yourself off track and want to go straight to your target, rather than get back onto the original track.
➤
To restart XTE:
1. Press the GOTO default soft key, the Follow/Goto soft keys are displayed.
2. Press the RESTART XTE soft key. The route origin moves to the current vessel position, thus the XTE becomes zero.
Going To an Individual Target Point
WPT
Rather than following a route, you can go directly to a selected target point, this can be an existing waypoint (not in the current route), or the cursor position.
➤
To navigate directly to an existing waypoint:
1. Use the trackpad to position the cursor over the desired waypoint until the letters WPT and the waypoint soft keys are displayed.
GOTO
WAYPOINT
EDIT
WAYPOINT
ERASE
WAYPOINT
MOVE
WAYPOINT
D4163-1
Alternatively, you can select the waypoint from the waypoint list as described in Section 7.3
.
81213_1.book Page 34 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-34 HD Series Fishfinders
GOTO
WAYPOINT
2. Press the GOTO WAYPOINT soft key.
Navigation to the selected waypoint begins. The soft key STOP GOTO is displayed.
3. To return to the default soft key display, move the cursor away from the waypoint or press ENTER or CLEAR .
➤
To navigate directly to the cursor position:
GOTO
GOTO
CURSOR
STOP
GOTO
1. Use the trackpad to position the cursor as desired.
2. Press the GOTO default soft key, followed by GOTO CURSOR .
If navigation is currently in progress you are warned “Already following route. Cancel route and goto cursor?”.
To cancel the GOTO CURSOR operation, press NO .
To continue with the GOTO CURSOR operation (and stop the current GOTO
ROUTE ), press YES .
The chartplotter places a temporary waypoint as the target and starts to navigate towards it. The waypoint is shown as a square with a circle and dot in the center and is connected to the vessel’s starting position with a dashed line.
The soft key STOP GOTO is displayed.
Note: The temporary waypoint is not added to the waypoint list. When the
GOTO
is complete or is stopped, the temporary waypoint is erased.
3. To return to the default soft key display, move the cursor away from the waypoint or press ENTER or CLEAR .
Stop Follow or Stop Goto
➤
To stop following the route or target point:
GOTO
If necessary, press the GOTO soft key, then press the STOP GOTO/FOLLOW soft key.
STOP
GOTO or
STOP
FOLLOW
Move the cursor over any waypoint or leg in the current route, then press the
STOP GOTO/FOLLOW soft key.
The dotted line from your vessel to the target waypoint disappears.
81213_1.book Page 35 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-35
If you subsequently use the FOLLOW ROUTE soft key to restart navigation, the route is followed from the point at which it was stopped. This is indicated by a square around the target waypoint. If you want to follow from another waypoint you can initiate the follow then use the WAYPOINT ADVANCE or
FOLLOW FROM HERE soft key to step through the route.
7.6 Transferring Waypoints and Routes
Displayed SeaTalk Waypoints
When a route is made current on any SeaTalk equipment in an integrated system, it is sent to all SeaTalk instruments including this chartplotter. This route will override any other current route. When GOTO waypoint or GOTO cursor is in operation it is considered a route.
The current route can be edited on any instrument with route edit capability.
Note: Transferred waypoints that are part of a route are not automatically saved by the chartplotter, however you can save the route locally, thus adding the waypoints to the local waypoint list.
Managing Database Lists
There are several methods of maintaining database lists. The method you choose will depend on the links available ( hsb 2 , SeaTalk or NMEA) and whether you want to transfer individual waypoints or the complete waypoint and route list:
• You can save the complete Waypoint and Route Lists to a user cartridge in the chart card slot.
• You can load new Waypoint and Route Lists from a user cartridge in the chart card slot.
• If waypoints are transmitted by other equipment on SeaTalk or NMEA, you can receive them on the chartplotter.
When RECEIVE WPTS FROM ST/NMEA is selected, any waypoints sent on
SeaTalk or NMEA are transferred and appended, one-by-one, to the waypoint list. Routes sent on NMEA are appended to the route list.
You can use this function to add waypoints from a PC connected via
NMEA.
• You can send the waypoint and route lists from the chartplotter to other instruments via NMEA using the SEND WPT LIST function.
Sending the waypoint list does not affect current routes.
The NMEA link could be to a PC.
81213_1.book Page 36 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-36 HD Series Fishfinders
MARKS
• You can transfer the waypoint and route lists from one chartplotter to another across an hsb 2 link using SEND WPT LIST ON HSB and RECIEIVE WPTS
FROM HSB .
WARNING:
The functions LOAD USER CARD, SEND WPT LIST ON HSB and RECIEIVE WPTS
FROM HSB replaces the existing waypoint and route lists with the transferred lists.
➤
To save waypoints to, or load waypoints from a user cartridge:
WARNING:
Loading waypoints from a user cartridge overwrites any existing waypoint and route lists.
1. Insert a C-MAP User Card into the lower of the two cartridge slots.
1. Press MARKS followed by the LOAD/SAVE USER CARD soft key.
2. The User Card Menu and associated soft keys are displayed.
3. Press the SAVE WPT/RTE DATA TO CARD or LOAD WPT/RTE DATA FROM CARD soft key. An appropriate warning and Yes/No soft keys are displayed.
USER CARD MENU
USER CARD PRESENT
WARNING
SAVING DATA TO THE USER
CARD WILL ERASE ALL EXISTING
WAYPOINT AND ROUTE DATA
ON THE CARD.
ARE YOU SURE ?
YES NO
D5594-1
4. Press Yes to continue or No to abandon the operation and return to the previous screen.
5. If the operation is successful, confirmation of the number of Routes and
Waypoints saved/loaded is displayed.
81213_1.book Page 37 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations
USER CARD MENU
USER CARD PRESENT
SAVE COMPLETE
SAVED 2 ROUTE(S) AND
7 WAYPOINT(S)
7-37
LOAD WPT/
RTE DATA
FROM CARD
SAVE WPT/
RTE DATA
TO CARD
CHECK
CARD IN
USER SLOT
D5595-1
If the operation fails, the Save Failed message is displayed.
USER CARD MENU
USER CARD NOT PRESENT
SAVE FAILED
NO OR INCORRECT CARD
ENSURE USER CARD IS CORRECTLY
INSERTED IN THE LOWER SLOT
LOAD WPT/
RTE DATA
FROM CARD
SAVE WPT/
RTE DATA
TO CARD
CHECK
CARD IN
USER SLOT
D5596-1
MARKS
WAYPOINT
LIST
WAYPOINT
TRANSFER
➤
To receive incoming waypoints on SeaTalk or NMEA:
1. To display the waypoint list, press MARKS followed by the WAYPOINT LIST soft key.
2. Press the WAYPOINT TRANSFER soft key.
3. Press the soft key RECEIVE WPTS FROM ST/NMEA .
The soft key changes to STOP RECEIVING WAYPOINTS .
When waypoints are transmitted by other equipment they are added to the waypoint list on the chartplotter. Routes transmitted on NMEA are appended to the route list.
4. To disable waypoint transfer, press the soft key STOP RECEIVING WAY-
POINTS .
Alternatively, press ENTER , or CLEAR , twice to close the Waypoint List.
81213_1.book Page 38 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-38 HD Series Fishfinders
WAYPOINT
TRANSFER
➤
To send the waypoint list on NMEA:
1. Display the waypoint list as previously described, then press the WAY-
POINT TRANSFER soft key.
2. Press the soft key SEND WPT LIST ON NMEA .
The soft key changes to STOP SENDING WAYPOINTS .
The waypoint and route lists are transmitted from the chartplotter to other instruments on NMEA.
➤
To receive the waypoint and route lists via hsb 2 , you must set-up the transfer on both display units - one unit will send waypoints, the other will receive them.
WAYPOINT
TRANSFER
WARNING:
Receiving waypoints from another hsb 2 instrument overwrites any existing waypoint and route lists.
1. Display the waypoint list as previously described, then press the WAY-
POINT TRANSFER soft key.
2. Press the soft key SEND WPT LIST ON HSB or RECIEIVE WPTS FROM HSB ; you are prompted to confirm.
Press NO to cancel the operation, then ENTER if you wish to remove the route list.
Press YES to continue. The waypoint list is transmitted to/from the chartplotter from/to another instrument on hsb 2 . While the data is being transferred the soft key changes to STOP SENDING WAYPOINTS ; when the transfer is complete the soft key is re-displayed.
81213_1.book Page 39 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-39
7.7 Using Tracks
The Track function is used to mark on-screen the trail that your vessel has followed, as if it had left a visible fixed wake.
While the track is turned on, it is recorded in the display unit’s memory. You specify the interval at which track points are made, a line is drawn on-screen between each point. A maximum of 750 track points each can be saved in the current track and in up to 5 saved tracks, for a total of up to 4500 points. The current track remains on-screen, even following a power off/on, until you clear the track.
A track can be saved and retrieved for display at a later date. For example, you may wish to display a previous track, and then place waypoints along it that you can follow. You can only display one track at a time; you must clear a current track from the screen if you want to display a saved track.
Breaks in the track will be caused when any of the following occur for longer than the specified track interval: the track is switched off then on; the position fix is lost; the display unit is switched off.
To enable you to follow this track on your return voyage, the SmartRoute function converts the track (or the last segment of a track with breaks) into a route which is automatically reversed, see SmartRoute on page 7-42 .
This section describes:
• Setting up a track, including how to specify the interval.
• Clearing the current track.
• Managing tracks, using the track list, including Saving, Naming, Erasing and Showing a track.
• Using Smart Route.
➤
To access the track controls:
1. From the chart display, press the MENU key to display the chart set up soft keys.
SYSTEM
SET UP!
CHART
SET UP!
TRACK
SET UP!
GPS
SETUP!
D4162-1
2. Press the TRACK SETUP soft key to display the Track soft keys:
TRACKS
OFF ON
CLEAR
TRACK
TRACK
LIST
TRACK
INTERVAL
D4179-1
The following instructions assume you have the track soft keys displayed.
81213_1.book Page 40 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-40 HD Series Fishfinders
Setting Up a Track
TRACK
INTERVAL
You use the track soft keys to switch the track on and to specify the interval at which track points are saved. The interval default is a distance of 0.1nm. The maximum track length is 500 points, when the track has reached this length, the first points are overwritten. The track is saved until you switch it off.
➤
To set up a track:
1. Press the TRACK INTERVAL soft key.
Press the appropriate soft key to set either a time interval or a distance interval: press the UP arrow to increase the interval, the DOWN arrow to decrease the interval.
Press ENTER to return to the track soft keys.
TIME
1S
DISTANCE
0.1nm
TRACK
OFF ON
D4258-1
2. Press the TRACK OFF ON soft key to toggle tracks on.
Your vessels trail will be displayed on-screen, with a line joining the points at the selected interval.
Clearing the Current Track
CLEAR
TRACK
SAVE
TRACK
You can clear the current track from the screen. When you select CLEAR
TRACK , if the current track has not been saved, you have the option of saving it.
➤
To clear the current track:
1. Press the CLEAR TRACK soft key.
2. If the track has not been saved the SAVE TRACK soft keys are displayed.
To clear the track without saving it in the Track List, press NO .
To save the track in the list, press YES . The Name track soft keys are displayed and you should continue as described in the following section, Saving and Naming a Track.
Press CLEAR to abort the Clear Track operation.
The current track is cleared from the screen and the default soft keys are displayed.
Managing Tracks
Although it is easy to set up a track and this track is retained even if you switch off your display, you can store a number of different tracks so that you can review them at a later date. This section explains how to:
• Save and name a track.
• Name, Erase and Show an existing track.
81213_1.book Page 41 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-41
Saving and Naming a Track
TRACK
LIST
SAVE
TRACK
You can save up to 5 named tracks in the Track List. These tracks can be redisplayed at a later date.
➤
To save and name the current track:
1. Press the TRACK LIST soft key. The track list pop-up and associated soft keys are displayed.
2. The next available entry on the track list is highlighted.
(If desired, you can use the trackpad to select another position in the list; this can be a blank slot or an existing track that you no longer require.)
3. Press SAVE TRACK . The name track soft keys are displayed.
NAME TRACK?
YES NO
D4256-1
4. If you do not wish to name or rename the track, press the NO soft key (or
CLEAR ) to clear the list. The track is saved and is listed as Track Not
Named.
5. If you wish to name the route press the YES soft key:
Use the trackpad to move the cursor right or left to the character you wish to edit. Then use the top or bottom of the trackpad to increase or decrease the letter or number.
or
Use the arrow keys and alphanumeric keys on the ST80 Navigator keypad to input or edit the characters, as described in Using the ST60 or ST80
Navigator Keypad on page 7-16 .
6. Press ENTER to finish and clear the Track List, then to return to the default soft key display, press ENTER again or CLEAR .
TRACK
LIST
NAME
TRACK
Naming, Erasing and Showing a Track
➤
To name an existing track, erase a track or show a track, you select the track from the track list, then press the appropriate soft key as follows:
1. Press the TRACK LIST soft key. The Track List is displayed. The grey selection bar indicates the selected track.
Select the desired track then press the appropriate soft key.
2. If you NAME a track:
81213_1.book Page 42 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-42 HD Series Fishfinders
ERASE
TRACK
SHOW
TRACK
Use the trackpad to move the cursor right or left to the character you wish to edit. Then use the top or bottom of the trackpad to edit the character. or
Use the arrow keys and alphanumeric keys on the ST80 Navigator keypad to input or edit the characters, as described in Using the ST60 or ST80
Navigator Keypad on page 7-16 .
Press ENTER finish the operation or CLEAR to cancel the name, then
ENTER to remove the track list.
3. If you ERASE a track you are prompted to confirm.
Press NO to cancel the operation, then ENTER if you wish to remove the track list.
Press YES to erase the track from the list, then ENTER to remove the track list.
4. If you SHOW a track and you have a current track on screen, you are prompted to save the track. Proceed as previously described in Clearing the
Current Track.
Alternatively, press the NO soft key to cancel the SHOW TRACK operation.
The track list is removed and the selected track is displayed.
5. Press ENTER or CLEAR to return to the default display.
SmartRoute
SmartRoute enables the current track, or the last segment of a track with breaks, to be converted to a route (the track could have been retrieved from the track list). SmartRoute places a waypoint at the last track point, then considers each point in turn and determines the closest route through the recorded track.
The number of waypoints created is minimized, while maintaining optimum correlation to the recorded track. On completion, the maximum deviation of the route from the recorded track is displayed.
➤
To convert the current track into a route:
1. Select MAKE INTO ROUTE and press ENTER .
The current track is converted to a new route and becomes the current route, with the most recently placed track point as the start of the route (that is: the track is reversed).
If there is an unsaved current route on screen, the option to save the route is given, see Section 7.4, Working with Routes .
2. Check the calculated route and, in particular, that the route deviation from the original, given in the warning box, is within navigable limits.
CAUTION:
Before following the route, ensure that it is safe for navigation, noting that it may deviate from your actual path travelled.
81213_1.book Page 43 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations 7-43
7.8 Typical Chart Scenarios
The following illustrations provide operating guidelines for typical navigation scenarios. These scenarios can be used as a training guide; they show you how to perform a particular operation and they introduce many of the chartplotter functions.
Each scenario indicates the key presses required to perform particular tasks. A typical chartplotter screen image is shown for each task.
The scenarios assume you have read the previous sections of this chapter and that you are familiar with the Operating Controls.
Operating guidelines are provided for the following scenarios:
• Working with Waypoints
Place a Waypoint
Goto a Waypoint
• Make and Follow a Routes
Create a Route
Follow a Route
• Review the Passage Plan
View Route Information
Change the SOG, Hours and ETA.
81213_1.book Page 44 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-44
Place and Goto a Waypoint
1.
Press MARKS
HD Series Fishfinders
1
2.
Position Cursor as required
2
Press the soft key
3
Press the soft key to go to the waypoint selected by the cursor.
D4267-1
81213_1.book Page 45 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations
4
The vessel navigates towards the target waypoint
See Sections:
7.3 Working wth Waypoints
7.5 Following Routes and Going to
Points
D4267-2d
7-45
81213_1.book Page 46 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-46
Make and Follow a Route
ROUTE GOTO SCREEN FIND SHIP
Press the soft key
HD Series Fishfinders
1
2
MAKE
ROUTE
EDIT
ROUTE
CLEAR
ROUTE MORE!
Press the soft key
3
1.
Position Cursor - in this example over an existing waypoint
2.
Press the soft key
4
Position Cursor for next waypoint, then press soft key.
Repeat to plot all waypoints in sequence.
D4268-1
81213_1.book Page 47 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations
5
7-47
ROUTE GOTO SCREEN FIND SHIP
GOTO
CURSOR
GOTO
WAYPOINT
FOLLOW
ROUTE
STOP
FOLLOW
GOTO
CURSOR
RESTART
XTE
WAYPOINT
ADVANCE
Press the soft key. The route becomes the current route.
6
Press the soft key
7
Press the soft key
The vessel starts to navigate to the first (target) waypoint in the route.
8
See Sections:
7.4 Working with Routes
7.5 Following Routes and Going to
Points
D4268-2d
81213_1.book Page 48 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-48
Review Your Passage Plan
ROUTE GOTO SCREEN FIND SHIP
MAKE
ROUTE
EDIT
ROUTE
CLEAR
ROUTE MORE!
Press the soft key
Press the soft key
REVERSE
ROUTE
SAVE
ROUTE
ROUTE
LIST MORE!
Press the soft key
HD Series Fishfinders
1
2
3
4
1.
Use the trackpad to move selection bar over required route.
2.
Press the soft key
5
Time defaults to ETA - and assumes the current time is the start time.
D4269-1
81213_1.book Page 49 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 7: Standard Chart Operations
6
See Section:
7.4 Working with Routes
Change the TIME to HOURS.
The display indicates it will take 32 minutes to reach the destination.
You can change the PLANNED SOG.
The display updates to indicate TIME required at the planned speed.
D4269-2d
7-49
81213_1.book Page 50 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
7-50 HD Series Fishfinders
81213_1.book Page 1 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 8: Advanced Chart Operations 8-1
Chapter 8: Advanced Chart Operations
8.1 Introduction
This chapter explains how to use the additional functions that are provided with the L770DRC Plus and L1260DRC Plus Combined Fishfinder/
Chartplotter units. Chart functions are also available on L770D Plus and
L1260D Plus fishfinder-only units, when connected to an hsb 2 Plus Series device with chartplotter functionality (see Section 2.9, Integrated Systems ).
This chapter covers the following topics:
• Measuring distances and bearings on the chart, using the VRM/EBL key
• Setting alarms and timers
• Man Overboard (MOB)
• Cursor Echo
• Radar Overlay
• GPS Setup
• Data Log Mode
In order to use some of these functions, you may need the following additional data from equipment connected to your system via a SeaTalk, hsb 2 , or NMEA link:
Table 8-1: Function of External Data
Data
Heading
COG
Example source Integrated functions available
Compass
*
GPS
- North Up or Course Up heading modes
- MOB (if speed data also available)
Radar data Radar system (via hsb 2
- Radar data, either full-screen or in a half-screen window
Position GPS system
Other data Transducers
- Waypoints
- Position, COG, SOG and time data in Data Box and Nav
Window
- MOB
- Data Log
- Data Box and Nav Window data displays, including speed, depth, wind, temperature
*If heading data is available via both NMEA and SeaTalk, NMEA data takes priority. For all other data,
SeaTalk data takes priority (see Section 8.3
).
81213_1.book Page 2 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
8-2 HD Series Fishfinders
8.2 Measuring Distances Using the VRM/EBL Key
VRM/EBL
You can obtain an accurate measurement of the distance and bearing between two points by using the VRM/EBL key.
➤
To place a ruler line and Ruler data box:
1. Position the cursor on the starting point from which you wish to measure.
2. Press VRM/EBL .
A Ruler data box is displayed showing the bearing and distance from the starting point to the cursor position. The character A appears at the cursor location.
3. Use the trackpad to move the cursor to the measurement end point. A line connects the cursor to the starting point and the Ruler data box is updated to show the bearing and length of the line as shown in Figure 8-1 .
4. Press ENTER to fix the end point of the ruler line and return to normal cursor control. The letter B marks the location of the end point on the chart.
Figure 8-1: Measuring Distance Using a VRM
81213_1.book Page 3 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 8: Advanced Chart Operations 8-3
➤
To re-position one end of the ruler line:
1. Move the cursor over the ruler line towards the end that you want to reposition, until the letters A → B are displayed.
2. Press ENTER to take cursor control of the ruler. The ruler end moves to the cursor which changes to a four-headed arrow.
3. Move the cursor to the desired position. The ruler data box is updated.
4. Press ENTER again to set the position and return to normal cursor control.
Alternatively, press CLEAR to reset the ruler to the previous position.
VRM/EBL
RULER
OFF ON
➤
To clear the ruler line and ruler data box either:
Move the cursor over the ruler line, until the letters A → B are displayed, then press CLEAR .
or:
Press VRM/EBL , the ruler soft keys are displayed. Press RULER OFF ON to toggle the ruler line and data box off.
RULER
DATABOX
OFF ON
➤
To clear the ruler data box:
Press VRM/EBL , the ruler soft keys are displayed. Press RULER DATABOX OFF
ON to toggle the ruler data box off.
➤
To move the Ruler data box, using the context-sensitive cursor:
BOX 1. Move the cursor over the box until the letters BOX are displayed and press
ENTER to take cursor control of the box.
2. Use the trackpad to move the box to its new location and press ENTER to drop it and return to normal cursor operation.
81213_1.book Page 4 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
8-4 HD Series Fishfinders
8.3 Alarms and Timers
Alarm Reporting
ALARMS
The chartplotter reports the following alarms, that are set using the ALARMS key:
Alarm
Arrival
Indicates:
Your vessel has arrived at the active waypoint: it has either reached the arrival circle (the radius of which is specified) or, has reached its closest point of approach (defined by a line passing through the waypoint and perpendicular to the route leg).
Off Track
Anchor
Your vessel has exceeded the specified distance (maximum cross track error) from the active route leg.
Your vessel has drifted from its anchor position (set when the alarm was turned on) by more than the specified distance.
Grounding The chartplotter checks a sector ahead of your vessel for a dangerous object (land, depth area, intertidal area, rock, obstruction or shore obstruction). You specify the depth and range of the sector from your vessel.
You can view a report of the objects that triggered the alarm.
Countdown The countdown timer has reached zero.
Alarm Clock The time matches the specified alarm time.
The alarms are switched on or off and the limits set using the Alarms Set Up menu, accessed from the ALARMS key.
When an alarm is triggered, the alarm buzzer sounds and a pop-up window describing the alarm is displayed.
➤
To silence the alarm and clear the message, press any key.
If the alarm was generated by the chartplotter, the appropriate action is taken.
For example, following an arrival alarm, the next route leg is activated.
If an anchor alarm is silenced, but the alarm condition persists, the alarm is repeated every 30 seconds.
External Alarms
All SeaTalk system alarms (except autopilot alarms) are received and displayed on the chartplotter. You can silence these alarms by pressing any key. No other action is taken by the chartplotter except to silence the alarm.
81213_1.book Page 5 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 8: Advanced Chart Operations 8-5
Setting Alarms and Timers
➤
To set up an alarm or timer:
ALARMS
1. Press the ALARMS key. The Alarms Set Up menu is displayed, showing the current settings (see Figure 8-2 ).
2. Use the trackpad to move the selection bar up or down the options. As each line is highlighted, the soft key labels are updated to show the current settings and controls.
ALARMS
ALARMS SET UP
ARRIVAL ALARM
OFF TRACK ALARM
ANCHOR ALARM
GROUNDING ALARM
COUNTDOWN TIMER
ALARM CLOCK
0.01nm
ON
OFF
5M/1.0nm
00:33:00
OFF
ALARM
OFF ON
SELECT ARRIVAL
ALARM RADIUS
D4265-4
Figure 8-2: Alarms Set Up List
3. Use the up or down soft keys to change the alarm setting. For example, for the arrival alarm you can adjust the radius from the waypoint at which the arrival alarm will be triggered.
The arrival, off track and anchor alarm distances can be set in the range
0.01 to 9.99 nm, in steps of 0.01nm.
The grounding alarm depth can be set from 1 to 20m in 1m steps and can be specified to cover a sector at a range from 0 to 1nm, in 0.1nm steps.
The timer is set in hours, minutes and seconds, and the alarm clock in hours and minutes.
4. If desired, press the ALARM OFF ON soft key to toggle the alarm on or off. If you turn an alarm off, its value is retained and will be used when you turn the alarm on again.
Note: You can turn all the alarms and timers on and off, except for the Arrival
Alarm which is always on.
5. Press ENTER to save the changes and clear the list.
81213_1.book Page 6 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
8-6 HD Series Fishfinders
8.4 Man Overboard (MOB)
MARKS
If you lose a person or object overboard and need to return to the location, you should use the Man Overboard (MOB) function.
You can select the type of data used for the MOB position using the set up menus (see Section 4.3
).
Note: To obtain MOB position, you need either of the following:
• Position data from a GPS or equivalent device
• Heading and speed data, so that the position can be calculated by dead reckoning
➤
To initiate the MOB procedure, press and hold the MARKS key for two seconds. The system then performs the following tasks automatically:
• Redraws the chart at 1/2 nm (even if cartography is not available but plotter mode is on).
• Marks the current position with a MOB symbol which replaces any current active waypoint and route.
• Displays the MOB data box, which shows the bearing and distance from your vessel to the MOB waypoint position and the elapsed time since the
MOB was initiated ( Figure 8-3 ).
• Displays the position data box, showing your vessel’s position.
• As your vessel moves from the MOB position, a dotted line is displayed connecting the MOB symbol and the vessel’s current position.
• Sounds a 4-second alarm pattern every 30 seconds.
• Sends an MOB message (including bearing and distance) to other units in the system, via the SeaTalk connection.
MOB position
MOB
RNG 0.33
nm
BRG 162° T
00:05:24
POSITION
N 49°54^76
W 002°09^83
D4273-3
MOB data box
Figure 8-3: MOB Display
81213_1.book Page 7 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 8: Advanced Chart Operations 8-7
MARKS
➤
To cancel the MOB, press and hold the MARKS key for 2 seconds.
The chart is re-drawn at its previous scale and the MOB symbol and data box are removed.
Note: The MOB procedure can also be initiated or cancelled if the appropriate SeaTalk message is received by the display unit.
8.5 Cursor Echo
In a system with a radar display connected via SeaTalk, you can set the display to enable cursor echo. Cursor echo (accessed from System Set Up, described in Section 4.3
) enables you to display a radar cursor on the chart picture, or a chart cursor on the radar picture (you cannot display a remote chart cursor in a chart window nor a remote radar cursor in a radar window).
The following options can be toggled ON or OFF :
• Radar Cursor In: displays the cursor from another radar on the chart display or chart window (default - OFF ).
• Chart Cursor In: displays the cursor from another or chartplotter on the radar display or radar window (default - OFF ).
Note: The remote display must have SeaTalk Cursor Out enabled.
• SeaTalk Cursor Out: enables the output, onto SeaTalk, of the display’s own cursor (default - OFF ).
• Cursor Echo Local: echoes the cursor position between open windows on the same display (default - ON ).
If you set the options to OFF , no cursor echo information is displayed.
When the appropriate option is switched on, the display shows its own cursor, plus the cursor of the other display with appropriate cursor text ( RDR or CHT ) to indicate its origin. This means that you could move the cursor over a target on the radar display and check the identity of the target by looking at the radar cursor position on the chartplotter.
8.6 Radar Overlay
If radar data is available from another display connected on hsb 2 , the radar targets can be overlaid onto the full-screen chartplotter display. The radar/ chart overlay option helps you to distinguish between fixed, charted objects and other objects that could be moving vessels. Some radar controls are available in overlay mode.
The following criteria must be true for radar/chart overlay to function correctly:
81213_1.book Page 8 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
8-8 HD Series Fishfinders
• Position and heading data are provided so that vessel position and orientation can be determined.
• The vessel must be displayed on screen.
• The chartplotter must be in North Up or Course Up mode (see Section 4.5
).
• The chartplotter range must be between 1/4nm and 48nm (equivalent to a radar range of 1/8nm to 24nm).
• Custom range scales are disabled on the radar.
• The radar must be transmitting.
To ensure the vessel remains on the screen, you could use Find Ship (see Using
FIND SHIP on page 5-26 ) to home the cursor onto the vessel.
When Radar/Chart overlay is switched on, the status bar indicates OVL . If the option is switched on but the overlay is not visible (because one of the above criteria has failed), the status bar indication changes to (OVL) .
When Radar/Chart overlay is switched on the soft key MORE...
provides access to the SCREEN soft key and to the radar controls TARGETS and MARPA .
The radar GAIN control is also active in overlay mode.
Radar/Chart overlay is displayed at the current chart range. You should be aware that if radar is shown on any other display, its range will match that displayed on Radar/Chart overlay. Conversely, if you change the radar range on any display, the Radar/Chart overlay image will change to the new radar range.
➤
To select radar/chart overlay:
1. Press the DISPLAY key to show the DISPLAY pop-up, then if necessary press again to select Chart mode.
2. Press the OVERLAY OFF ON soft key to toggle the option on.
The two highest intensity radar returns are displayed in purple, over the chart image. The radar image is translucent, so that chart text, contours and outlines are visible beneath the radar targets.
81213_1.book Page 9 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 8: Advanced Chart Operations 8-9
8.7 GPS Setup
GPS set up page provides you with information and the status of the tracked navigation satellites for a SeaTalk GPS. It also enables you to SET UP a SeaTalk
Differential GPS, by manually retuning it to a different differential beacon.
MENU
GPS
SETUP!
Note: The satellite information is not available when you use an NMEA GPS.
➤
To select GPS Set Up:
1. Press MENU , then press the GPS SETUP...
soft key.
The Navigation Status pop-up window shown in Figure 8-4 . This window provides, for each tracked satellite, the satellite number, its signal strength, azimuth angle and elevation angle from your vessel.
SAT
03
31
21
23
22
19
17
27
16
15
NAVIGATION STATUS
SIGNAL STATUS AZ
IN USE
IN USE
IN USE
IN USE
IN USE
IN USE
IN USE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
085
292
127
075
174
290
056
321
024
237
HDOP
1
FIX STATUS
FIX
ELEV
085
051
048
043
028
014
012
011
005
065
RESTART
GPS
D-GPS
SETUP!
GPS
SETUP!
D4281-2
Figure 8-4: Navigation Status Window
➤
To tune a differential SeaTalk GPS to another beacon:
1. Press D-GPS SETUP , the Differential GPS Setup pop-up is displayed with
MODE and BEACON SELECT soft keys.
2. Press MODE AUTO MAN to toggle the GPS to manual tuning.
3. Press BEACON SELECT , use the soft keys to set the desired beacon frequency and bit rate.
The status of the selected beacon is displayed in the pop-up.
Press ENTER to select the beacon and return to the Navigation Status window, then ENTER to return to the MENU soft keys.
81213_1.book Page 10 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
8-10 HD Series Fishfinders
Note: Under normal circumstances RESTART GPS is not required.
8.8 Data Log Mode
You can set the chartplotter to log course data every thirty minutes. Up to 48 log entries are held, when 48 entries have been made, the chartplotter will start overwriting the first entries.
You start the log using soft keys provided in Data Log Mode. When you select
Data Log Mode the log is displayed full-screen. If the screen is full, you use the trackpad to scroll the list and view further log entries. Each line in the log shows:
• Time of log entry
• Position at time of log entry
• Course Made Good (CMG) since last log entry
• Distance Made Good (DMG) since last log entry
Once you have enabled the data log, data is continually logged, but you must set the display to Data Log Mode to view it. You use the DISPLAY key to change the full-screen mode.
DISPLAY
START LOG
You can stop the log at any time and you can clear the log from memory.
➤
To activate Data Log Mode:
1. Press DISPLAY , the DISPLAY pop-up is shown.
2. Press DISPLAY again, until LOG is selected, then press ENTER .
➤
To start recording log entries, press the START LOG soft key.
As shown in Figure 8-5 , the chartplotter records the time and vessels position.
Every thirty minutes the time, new position, distance made good and course made good are recorded.
The START LOG soft key changes to STOP LOG .
81213_1.book Page 11 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 8: Advanced Chart Operations
TIME POSITION CMG DMG
15:30 346°
M
6.86
KM
16:00
16:30
17:00
17:30
18:00
18:30
19:00
19:30
50°21^890N
001°20^610W
50°18^010N
001°20^070W
50°21^850N
001°19^290W
50°18^500N
001°21^300W
50°20^990N
001°18^280W
50°19^660N
001°21^960W
50°19^730N
001°18^030W
50°20^930N
001°21^750W
50°18^550N
001°18^650W
180°
M
012°
M
206°
M
043°
M
245°
M
093°
M
302°
M
145°
M
7.23
KM
7.23
KM
6.67
KM
5.74
KM
5.00
KM
4.63
KM
5.00
KM
5.74
KM
8-11
STOP LOG CLEAR LOG
D4284-1
Figure 8-5: Data Log Window
➤
To stop recording log entries:
STOP LOG
Press the STOP LOG soft key.
➤
To clear the log entries:
CLEAR LOG
Press the CLEAR LOG soft key, you are prompted “Are You Sure”. To cancel the
CLEAR LOG operation press the NO soft key.
To continue press the YES soft key, all log entries are deleted, but the data log remains active.
➤
To return to the chart display,:
DISPLAY Press DISPLAY to select the chart mode, then press ENTER .
The log continues until you return to the data log mode and press STOP LOG .
STOP LOG
81213_1.book Page 12 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
8-12 HD Series Fishfinders
81213_1.book Page 1 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 9: Maintenance and Problem Solving 9-1
Chapter 9: Maintenance and Problem
Solving
This chapter provides information on routine maintenance and on possible causes of problems you may experience with your HD Series system.
9.1 Maintenance
WARNING:
These units contains high voltage . Adjustments require specialized service procedures and tools only available to qualified service technicians. There are no user serviceable parts or adjustments and the operator should not attempt to service the equipment. The operator should not remove the rear cover of the units.
WARNING:
REMOVAL OF A UNIT’S COVER BY ANYONE OTHER THAN
QUALIFIED SERVICE TECHNICIANS WILL VOID THE
WARRANTY.
Switch off the display unit before removing the power cord. Power off the display unit and DSM250 before removing the transducer cable.
CAUTION:
Removing the transducer cable from the fishfinder display or the
DSM250 while the unit is powered on can cause sparks. Only remove the transducer cable after power has been removed.
Routine Checks
The LCD display and Digital Sounder Module are sealed units. Maintenance procedures are therefore limited to the following periodic checks:
• Examine the cables for signs of damage, such as chafing, cuts or nicks.
• Check that the cable connectors are firmly attached.
81213_1.book Page 2 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
9-2 HD Series Fishfinders
Cleaning Instructions
Cleaning the Display and Sounder Module
WARNING:
Take care when cleaning the display. Use the display cleaning cloth provided. Avoid wiping the display screen with other types of dry cloth - this could scratch the screen coating.
Do not use acid, ammonia based or abrasive products.
• Ensure power is off, wipe the display clean with a damp cloth.
• If necessary, use IPA (isopropyl alcohol) or a mild detergent solution to remove grease marks.
Cleaning the Transducer
Sea growth can collect quickly on the bottom of the transducer, this can reduce the performance in just a few weeks. To prevent the build-up of sea growth, coat the transducer with a thin layer of paint. Use only a water-based antifouling paint, or a water-based paint specifically designed for transducers.
Apply the paint with a brush.
If your transducer becomes fouled or stops working because of sand or sea growth, use a stiff brush to clean it. You may sand the surface with a fine-grit wet or dry sandpaper (#320 grade or finer), but this will affect the performance of the unit when the boat is moving at higher speeds.
The paddle wheel mechanism may become jammed by dirt, grit or barnacles.
Work the contaminant out of the mechanism, then clean the unit with soap and water or alcohol.
Cleaning the Hull
Use caution when sanding or cleaning the outside of the hull near the transducer.
WARNING:
Harsh cleaning solvents such as acetone may damage the transducer.
81213_1.book Page 3 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 9: Maintenance and Problem Solving 9-3
EMC Servicing and Safety Guidelines
• Raymarine equipment should be serviced only by authorized Raymarine service technicians. They will ensure that service procedures and replacement parts used will not affect performance. There are no user serviceable parts in any Raymarine product.
• Some products generate high voltages, so never handle the cables/connectors when power is being supplied to the equipment.
• When powered up, all electrical equipment produces electromagnetic fields. These can cause adjacent pieces of electrical equipment to interact with one another, with a consequent adverse effect on operation. In order to minimise these effects and enable you to get the best possible performance from your Raymarine equipment, guidelines are given in the installation instructions, to enable you to ensure minimum interaction between different items of equipment, i.e. ensure optimum Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC).
• Always report any EMC-related problem to your nearest Raymarine dealer. We use such information to improve our quality standards.
• In some installations, it may not be possible to prevent the equipment from being affected by external influences. In general this will not damage the equipment but it can lead to spurious resetting action, or momentarily may result in faulty operation.
81213_1.book Page 4 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
9-4 HD Series Fishfinders
9.2 Resetting the System
There are two types of resets available for the HD Fishfinder system. The
Display Unit resets affect system-wide settings or those that pertain only to the display. Sounder Module resets affect the sonar settings.
Display Unit Resets
There are three Display Unit resets available:
• Picture Reset.
Press and hold the DISPLAY key for two seconds to return the screen to the full-screen picture of the top window with all windows cleared.
• Power-On Reset. When you turn the display off and on again, the screen reverts to the fishfinder or chart picture with all windows cleared.
At power-on, the last-used values are retained for all the options, except for those listed in the following table which are reset to the factory default each time.
Table 9-1: Display Unit Power On Default Settings
Item
Heading Mode
Brightness
Power-on setting
North Up (chart)
54% if previously left to less than 54%, or else restores previous setting
• Factory Reset.
This resets all values back to their original factory settings.
WARNING:
The factory reset clears the Marks database and the chartplotter
Waypoints and Routes databases. The factory reset also returns the
Sonar HSB Mode to REPEATER .
➤
To perform a display unit (system) factory reset:
1. Press MENU .
2. Press the SYSTEM SET UP soft key to display the System Set Up page (see
Section 4.3
for details).
3. Press and hold MENU for 5 seconds.
A countdown timer is displayed. If you release the MENU key before the timer reaches zero, the reset is not performed.
When the reset request has been accepted, the system restarts.
The factory default settings are listed in Section 4.3
.
81213_1.book Page 5 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 9: Maintenance and Problem Solving 9-5
Sounder Module Reset
There are two Sounder Module resets available:
• Power-On Reset. When you turn the DSM250 off and on again, all previous settings are retained except for those listed in the following table, which are reset to the factory default:
.
Table 9-2: Sounder Module Power On Default Settings
Item
Range Shift
Manual Scroll Speed
Power-on Setting
0 feet
100%
• Factory Reset. This resets all DSM250 values to their original factory settings.
WARNING:
The factory reset clears the sonar depth offset and speed and temperature calibrations.
➤
To perform a sounder module (sonar) factory reset:
MENU
SONAR
SET UP¬
RESET TO
DEFAULTS
1. Press MENU on the display unit.
2. Press the SONAR SET UP soft key to display the Sonar Set Up page.
3. Press and hold MENU for 5 seconds.
4. The RESET TO DEFAULTS soft key appears.
5. Press RESET TO DEFAULTS.
New soft keys appear: ARE YOU SURE? YES. NO .
Pressing NO returns you to the Sonar Setup Menu.
Pressing YES causes the DSM250 to reset all settings to factory default: i. The power on the DSM250 cycles OFF and ON.
ii. The message SONAR DATA UNAVAILABLE appears.
iii. An audible alarm is sounded.
iv. The normal sonar image resumes scrolling across the display.
The reset is complete.
➤
To cancel the reset:
Before pressing YES as described in item 4 above, press any of the following keys: DISPLAY , MULTI , VRM/EBL , MARKS , RANGE , GAIN , or
ALARMS .
This action opens up a new menu according to the key pressed.
or
Press either the ENTER or CLEAR key. This action returns the unit to the
Sonar Set Up menu.
81213_1.book Page 6 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
9-6 HD Series Fishfinders
9.3 Problem Solving
All Raymarine products are, prior to packing and shipping, subjected to comprehensive test and quality assurance programs. However, if this unit should develop a fault, please refer to the following table to identify the most likely cause and the corrective action required to restore normal operation.
If you still have a problem after referring to the table below, contact your local dealer, national distributor or Raymarine Technical Services Department for further advice. Always quote the product serial numbers. The display unit serial number is printed on the back of the unit.
Common Problems and Their Solutions
Table 9-3: Common Fishfinder Problems
Problem
Display does not function
Display “freezes”
Fishfinder does not see bottom or fish
Fishfinder does not display fish
Fishfinder display is unreliable at high boat speeds
Fishfinder displays a lot of background noise
Fishfinder speed or log readings are wrong
Fishfinder temperature readings are wrong
Correction
1. Make sure that the power supply cable is sound and that all connections are tight and free from corrosion.
2. Check the system fuse.
1. Check the scroll speed is not set to zero.
2. Check the transducer cable for damage. If damaged, the cable and transducer must be replaced as a unit.
1. If you have a transom-mount transducer, check that the transducer hasn’t kicked-up on hitting an object.
2. Check that the gain is not set too low.
3. Check that the transducer is within 10° of vertical.
4. Check that the transducer face is not covered or fouled. If necessary clean the transducer.
5. Check the voltage from the power source; if this is too low it can affect the transmitting power of the Fishfinder.
1. Fish arches are not displayed if the boat is stopped - fish appear on the display as straight line.
2. Ensure the transducer is within 10 ° of vertical.
3. Check that the gain is not set too low.
1. Turbulence around the transducer may be confusing the unit.
1. Check that the gain is not set too high.
2. Check that the transducer is mounted correctly and is clean.
1. Check that the transducer paddle wheel is clean.
2. If necessary add a speed offset.
3. If receiving SeaTalk speed, unplug the SeaTalk connector.
1. If necessary, adjust the TEMP CALIBRATE parameter.
2. If receiving SeaTalk temperature, unplug the SeaTalk connector.
81213_1.book Page 7 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 9: Maintenance and Problem Solving 9-7
Status LED
The LED on the connector panel provides valuable information on the status of your DSM250. The LED blinks green while the module is operating normally. If the unit detects a problem, the LED blinks amber to indicate a warning or red for an error. The number of times the LED blinks is a code representing the nature of the problem. For multiple warnings/errors, the codes are given in sequence with a 1.5 second pause between strings.
I
N
R
N
G
S
E
R
R
O
R
S
The following table shows the various LED status codes and their meanings.
Table 9-4: Status LED Indications
Meaning Cleared every 10 min
W
A blinks
Amber 1
2
Red
6
7
8
3
4
5
1
2
7
8
5
6
3
4
Transducer Sense Failure hsb 2 not detected
1
High Temperature Warning
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Watchdog Timeout Reboot
Unknown Error
Battery Voltage Error
High Temperature Error
Flash Memory Failure
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Hardware Monitor Failure
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
1
After 30 seconds of no hsb 2 activity, the DSM250 enters Standby mode: No sonar pings are emitted and no warnings are output on the LED.
Instead, the LED blinks green once every 10 seconds.
For example, if the Transducer Sense fails and hsb 2 is not detected, the unit blinks amber once, pauses 1.5 secs, blinks amber twice 0.5 secs apart, pause
1.5 secs, and then repeats the sequence until the problems are resolved or (for some warnings/errors) up to 10 minutes elapse.
81213_1.book Page 8 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
9-8 HD Series Fishfinders
A solid red LED (not blinking) indicates a fatal error condition. If the event of a fatal error, the system will power cycle to attempt to self-correct the condition. If the condition persists, please contact Raymarine Customer
Service.
9.4 Updating Software on the Display Unit
Before it can show sonar data received from the DSM250, the display unit must be running a software version that recognizes the sounder module on the hsb 2 network. The DSM250 contains a program routine that automatically polls the software version running on the display unit and if necessary, updates it (via hsb 2 ) to be compatible with the DSM250. This Auto Update feature should be run before using the DSM250 for the first time with a display that is not an HD Series Fishfinder. The DSM250 will not work with older HSB
(non-PLUS) displays.
Note: Older HSB (non-PLUS) display units must receive PLUS software and hardware upgrades before they can function with the DSM250.
➤
To automatically check and update the display unit software version:
1. Ensure both the DSM250 and display unit are powered off.
2. Ensure the HSB cable is properly connected between the units.
3. Disconnect the transducer cable from the DSM250. (This is essential.)
4. Power on the DSM250.
5. Within 30 seconds of powering on the DSM250, power on the display unit.
If running an older version, the display software is updated and the unit beeps. When the software update is complete (or if no update is required), the normal startup screen appears on the display.
6. Power off the DSM250 and reconnect the transducer.
7. Power on the DSM250.
81213_1.book Page 9 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 9: Maintenance and Problem Solving 9-9
9.5 How to Contact Raymarine
On the Internet
Visit the Raymarine World Wide Web site for the latest information on
Raymarine electronic equipment and systems at: www.raymarine.com
Customer Support
Navigate to the Customer Support page for links to:
• Finding Factory Service locations and Authorized Dealers near you
• Registering your Raymarine products
• Accessing handbooks in Adobe Acrobat format
• Downloading RayTech software updates
• Accessing the Raymarine solution database
Clicking the Find Answers link routes you to our solution database. Search questions and answers by product, category, keywords, or phrases. If the answer you are seeking is not available, click the Ask Raymarine tab to submit your own question to our technical support staff, who reply to you by email.
In the US
Accessories and Parts
Many Raymarine accessory items and parts can be obtained directly from your authorized Raymarine dealer. However, if you are in need of an item not available from the retailer, please contact Raymarine Technical Services at:
800-539-5539 ext. 2333, or
603-881-5200.
Technical Service is available Monday through Friday 4:00 AM to 6:00 PM
Eastern Time.
Please have the Raymarine item or part number ready when calling if placing an order. If you are not sure which item is appropriate for your unit, you should first contact the Technical Support Department to verify your requirements:
800-539-5539 ext. 2444, or
603-881-5200.
81213_1.book Page 10 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
9-10 HD Series Fishfinders
Technical Support
For technical support, call:
800-539-5539 ext. 2444, or
603-881-5200.
Our Technical Support Specialists are available to answer questions about installing, operating and trouble-shooting all Raymarine products.
Questions can be sent directly to our Technical Support Department via the
Internet. Point your browser to www.raymarine.com
and click on the
Customer Support link. From there, select Find Answers and click the Ask
Raymarine tab.
Product Repair and Service
In the unlikely event your Raymarine unit should develop a problem, please contact your authorized Raymarine dealer for assistance. The dealer is best equipped to handle your service requirements and can offer timesaving help in getting the equipment back into normal operation.
In the event that repairs can not be obtained conveniently, product service may also be obtained by returning the unit to:
Raymarine, Inc.
Product Repair Center
22 Cotton Road, Unit D
Nashua, NH 03063-4219
The Product Repair Center is open Monday through Friday 8:15 a.m. to
5:00 p.m. Eastern Time. All products returned to the Repair Center are registered upon receipt. A confirmation letter will be sent to you acknowledging the repair status and the product’s reference number. Should you wish to inquire about the repair status of your unit, contact the Product
Repair Center at:
800-539-5539
Please have the product reference number, or unit serial number, ready when you call. We will do everything possible to make the repair and return your unit as quickly as possible.
81213_1.book Page 11 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Chapter 9: Maintenance and Problem Solving 9-11
In Europe
In Europe, Raymarine support, service and accessories may be obtained from your authorized dealer, or contact:
Raymarine Ltd
Anchorage Park
Portsmouth, Hampshire
England PO3 5TD
Tel +44 (0) 23 9269 3611
Fax +44 (0) 23 9269 4642
Technical Support
The Technical Services Department handles inquiries concerning installation, operation, fault diagnosis and repair. For technical helpdesk contact:
Tel:+44 (0) 23 9271 4713
Fax: +44 (0) 23 9266 1228
Questions can be sent directly to our Technical Support Department via the
Internet. Point your browser to www.raymarine.com
and click on the
Customer Support link. From there, select Find Answers and click the Ask
Raymarine tab.
Accessories and Parts
Raymarine accessory items and parts are available through your authorized
Raymarine dealer. Please refer to the lists of component part numbers and optional accessories in the Installation chapter of this manual and have the
Raymarine part number ready when speaking with your dealer.
If you are uncertain about what item to choose for your Raymarine unit, please contact our Customer Services Department prior to placing your order.
Worldwide Support
Please contact the authorized distributor in the country.
81213_1.book Page 12 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
9-12 HD Series Fishfinders
81213_1.book Page 1 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Appendix A: Specifications
Appendix A: Specifications
HD Series Fishfinder Displays
General
A-1
Approvals:
CE - conform to
FCC - conforms to
Size: L770D, L770DRC
L1260D, L1260DRC
Weight: L770D, L770DRC
L1260D, L1260DRC
Mounting
Power:
L770D, L770DRC
L1260D, L1260DRC
Environmental:
Operating/Storage
Temp. Range:
Humidity limit:
Controls:
Cursor:
Display Type:
L770D, L770DRC
L1260D, L1260DRC
Resolution:
Display Size:
L770D, L770DRC
L1260D, L1260DRC
Illumination
Languages
Connectors
89/336/EEC (EMC), EN60945:1997
Part 80 (47CFR) and Part 2 (47CFR)
8.8" x 8.1" x 6" (223 x 205 x 152 mm), excluding bracket
11.5" x 11.4" x 5.46" (292 x 289 x 139 mm), excluding bracket
8.16 lbs (3.7 kg)
12.8 lbs (5.8 kg)
Bracket with panel mount option
External 10.7 - 44 VDC required, Floating earth/fully isolated
20 W consumption with full backlighting
30 W consumption with full backlighting
Waterproof to CFR46; suitable for external mounting
-10°C to +50°C up to 95% at 35°C non-condensing
11 defined keys, 4 soft keys and trackpad
Context sensitive, provides range/bearing or lat/lon
7" Color Thin Film Transistor (TFT) LCD
10.4" Color TFT LCD
640 x 480 (VGA)
136 mm x 100 mm
211 mm x 154.4 mm
Screen: Color LCD - Backlighting adjustable 0% to 100%
Keypad: 3 levels of backlighting
UK English, US English, Danish, French, German, Dutch, Italian,
Icelandic, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish, Swedish, Finnish
7 pin transducer
3 pin HSB input/output
3 pin SeaTalk input/output
7 pin power including 2 NMEA input channels
4 pin NMEA output
81213_1.book Page 2 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
A-2 HD Series Fishfinders
Interfaces
Man Overboard
(MOB Mode)
Screen Functions
Data Boxes
1 x SeaTalk, receive and transmit
1 x hsb 2 , receive and transmit
2 x NMEA 0183, receive
1 x NMEA 0183, transmit
C-MAP cartridge reader - 2 slots (Raychart models only)
Mark placed with course line; readout shows range, bearing, lat/lon of MOB and time elapsed since MOB.
Full, half, and quarter screens available dependent on function
Up to six user selectable information boxes
Fishfinder Features
Output Power:
L770D, L770DRC
L1260D, L1260DRC
Frequency
Depth:
L770D, L770DRC
L1260D, L1260DRC
Target Detection
Display Windows
Display Modes
Waypoints
Color Options
600 Watts RMS
1000 Watts RMS
Dual 50 KHz and 200 KHz
1 to 3000 ft (1000 m)
1 to 5000 ft (1700 m)
Sonar echo with target depth readout
Full or split screen of either frequency, digital data and chart if
Raychart equipped. Radar screen if available via hsb 2 .
A-Scope with bottom coverage, Bottom Lock, Auto or Manual
Zoom, White Line
998 waypoints entered at cursor or vessel position
Background color selection: black, dark gray, light gray, white or blue.
Two color palettes
Adjustable color thresholds
81213_1.book Page 3 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Appendix A: Specifications A-3
Chartplotter Features (Units with Raychart)
Cartography
Display Windows
Chart Scaling
Presentation Modes
Waypoints
Waypoint Transfer
Routes
Track History
Alarms
Navigation Information
Variation Source
Chart/Radar Synchronization
C-MAP® NT and NT+ micro cartridges available from C-MAP®
Chart of the world built in
Chart, Radar, Data Log, BDI, CDI, Navdata
1/64 nm (if cartographic data is available) to 4000 nm
North up (selectable True or Magnetic) Head up or Course up
998 waypoints entered via cursor, lat/lon, range and bearing from present position or at vessels position.
16 character name can be assigned hsb 2 , current route via SeaTalk, NMEA
A route plan may contain up to 50 waypoints. Up to 20 routes can be stored in the units internal memory
5 tracks with up to 750 points in each can be stored in the units internal memory
Programmable arrival, cross track error, anchor drift, position fix/ data loss warning, grounding, countdown timer and alarm clock
Own ships position in Lat/Lon, XTE, TTG and SOG/COG selectable.
Mileage scale ruler. Bearing and distance to waypoint. Bearing and distance to cursor, SeaTalk data (see ‘interfacing’ section)
Auto (SeaTalk/NMEA/Internal algorithm) or Manual
User selectable in split screen mode provided radar/chart data available
Interfacing
High Speed Bus
SeaTalk Input
NMEA Input
SeaTalk Output
NMEA Output
Fully independent use of remote Chart data if present on hsb 2 . Full remote control and display of Radar data if present on hsb 2 .
Depth, Speed Over Ground & Course Over Ground, Position,
Waypoint number, range, bearing and time to go, Speed through water, Time, Cross Track Error, Heading, Wind, Date, Log/Trip, Pilot
Status, Temperature, Man Overboard, and cursor position
NMEA 0183 (GLL, GGA, GLC, GTD, VTG, BWC, BWR, RMA, RMB,
RMC, XTE, VHW, HDG, HDM, HDT, DBT, DPT, APB,VLW, MWV,
MTW,WPL, RTE and ZDA)
Cursor data, Guard zone alarm and Navigational data bridged from NMEA
APB, BWC, BWR,DBT, DPT,GGA, GLL, MTW, RMA, RMB, RMC, RSD,
TTM, VLW, VHW, VTG, WPL
81213_1.book Page 4 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
A-4 HD Series Fishfinders
DSM250 Digital Sounder Module
General
Approvals:
CE - conform to
Size:
Weight:
Mounting
Power:
Voltage
Current
Fuse
Environmental:
Operating Range:
Storage Range:
Humidity:
Connectors
Interfaces
89/336/EEC (EMC), EN60945:1997
10.76" x 7.37" x 2.43" (273.3 x 187.2 x 61.7 mm)
2.2 lbs (1.0 kg)
Four keyholed mounting tabs, mounting screws
Reverse polarity protected
External 10 - 32 VDC required
0.5 A (8.0 A peak)
8 A (recommended)
Waterproof to CFR46
0°C to +55°C
-10°C to +70°C up to 95% at 35°C non-condensing
7 pin transducer
3 pin HSB input/output
3 pin power external ground
1 x hsb 2 , receive and transmit
Sounder Features
Output Power: with standard transducer
Adjustable to 600 watts RMS with high performance transducer
Adjustable to 1000 Watts RMS
Frequency
Pulse Length:
Max. Transmit Rate: 1580 pulses / min. @ 50’ range
Depth: 3 to 3000 ft (1000 m)
Transducer:
Dual 50 kHz and 200 kHz
100 µsec to 4 msec
Dual 50 kHz and 200 kHz
100 µsec to 4 msec
1580 pulses / min. @ 50’ range
3 to 5000 ft (1700 m)
Transom-mount, in-hull or thru-hull Transom-mount, in-hull, or thru-hull
81213_1.book Page 1 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Appendix B: Using the Auxiliary Junction Box B-1
Appendix B: Using the Auxiliary Junction Box
The SeaTalk Auxiliary Junction Box is used to connect SeaTalk GPS and
Differential beacon receivers to your HD Series Fishfinder.
Note: With the exception of the Raystar 114, when you use the following Differential Beacon Receiver configurations, the receiver must be set to AUTO
MODE in the GPS Set-Up page. Manual selections will not be accepted. Refer to Section 8.7 for details.
The recommended method of providing position, course over ground and speed over ground information to the fishfinder displays is by connection to a
SeaTalk GPS. The HD Series Fishfinders are supplied with an Auxiliary
Junction Box, whose main purpose is to make this connection easier. The junction box has two flying leads, one with a SeaTalk plug for connection to the display and the other lead is for connection to a 12V power supply (the display does not provide power for the GPS).
The following sections detail the connections to the Auxiliary Junction Box for several different types of GPS, including a beacon receiver if installed. Except for Raystar 114, the differential beacon receivers used are NRD-2A, Apelco
BR101 and the Autohelm Beacon Receiver.
The connections detailed in the following sections ensure that the GPS will always operate in SeaTalk mode. Note that the Raystar 112LP and Raystar 120 must be the SeaTalk versions.
81213_1.book Page 2 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
B-2 HD Series Fishfinders
Raystar 112, 105, Apelco 182 and 182XT
To connect your GPS to your Fishfinder, you must first cut off the 6-pin connector and strip back the insulation on all the wires. Connect to the
Auxiliary Junction Box as shown in the first illustration below.
To connect your Differential Beacon Receiver, you must cut off the 5-pin connector, strip back the insulation on all the wires, and connect to the
Auxiliary Junction Box as shown in the second illustration below.
CAUTION:
Ensure the correct polarity of the 12 V supply before applying display or
SeaTalk power. It is recommended that a multimeter is used to check the connections.
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
Black
12V
Power
Supply
(fused) Red
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
White
Brown
From
GPS sensor
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
D4294-3
Black
Red
Yellow
Green
White
Brown
From
GPS sensor
Black
12V
Power
Supply
(fused) Red
Black
Red
Yellow
White
Green
From the
DBR
D4295-3
81213_1.book Page 3 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Appendix B: Using the Auxiliary Junction Box B-3
Autohelm GPS, Z260 and Z273
To connect your GPS to your Fishfinder connect the wires as shown in the first illustration below.
To connect your Differential Beacon Receiver, you must cut off the 5-pin connector, strip back the insulation on all the wires, and connect to the
Auxiliary Junction Box as shown in the second illustration below.
CAUTION:
Ensure the correct polarity of the 12 V supply before applying display or
SeaTalk power. It is recommended that a multimeter is used to check the connections.
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
Black
12V
Power
Supply
(fused) Red
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Brown
From
GPS sensor
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
D4297-3
Black
Red
Green
Yellow
White
Brown
From
GPS sensor
Black
12V
Power
Supply
(fused) Red
Black
Red
Yellow
White
Green
From the
DBR
D4298-3
81213_1.book Page 4 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
B-4 HD Series Fishfinders
Raystar 112LP (SeaTalk version)
To connect your Raystar 112LP to your Fishfinder, refer to the first illustration below or follow the instructions in Chapter 2 .
To connect the Raystar 112LP and your Differential Beacon Receiver, cut off the 5-pin connector and strip back the red, black, and green wires. Remove the sleeve from the end of the Raystar 112LP cable to expose the green and brown wires, then connect to the Auxiliary Junction Box as shown in the second illustration below.
CAUTION:
Ensure the correct polarity of the 12 V supply before applying display or
SeaTalk power. It is recommended that a multimeter is used to check the connections.
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
Screen
Red
Yellow
From
GPS sensor
Black
12V
Power
Supply
(fused) Red
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
D4292-3
Screen
Red
Yellow
Green
Brown
From
GPS sensor
12V
Power
Supply
(fused)
Black
Red
Black
White
Red
Green
Yellow
From the
DBR
D4296-3
81213_1.book Page 5 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Appendix B: Using the Auxiliary Junction Box B-5
Raystar 114 Combined GPS and Differential Beacon
Receiver
To connect your Raystar 114 Combined GPS and Differential Beacon
Receiver to your Fishfinder, cut off the 5-pin connector, strip back the insulation on all the wires and connect to the Auxiliary Junction Box as shown in the illustration below.
CAUTION:
Ensure the correct polarity of the 12 V supply before applying display or
SeaTalk power. It is recommended that a multimeter is used to check the connections.
Note: You can use the GPS Set-Up page to manually tune the Raystar 114.
Refer to Chapter 8 for details.
To Display Unit
SeaTalk Socket
Black
White
Red
Yellow
Green
From
Combined
GPS/DBR sensor
Black
12V
Power
Supply
(fused) Red
D4301_1
81213_1.book Page 6 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
B-6 HD Series Fishfinders
Raystar 120 WAAS Satellite Differential Receiver
To connect your Raystar 120 WAAS Satellite Differential Receiver to your
Fishfinder, connect to the Auxiliary Junction Box as shown in the illustration below. Optional connections to RTCM are also shown. Note that the green wire is not used.
CAUTION:
Ensure the correct polarity of the 12 V supply before applying display or
SeaTalk power. It is recommended that a multimeter is used to check the connections.
!"
%!& ' (
!!" "(
#$
%%&
!"
81213_1.book Page 1 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Appendix C: C-MAP Chart Card Features C-1
Appendix C: C-MAP Chart Card Features
The C-MAP chart cards display cartographic features which are derived from a library of symbols. The library includes a set of 16 x 16 pixel bitmaps which provide realistically shaped icons for many chart objects. However, these complex icons can overlap and clutter the display at some scales, so it possible for the user to select smaller, simple icons. Some chart objects are represented by text. In such cases conventional abbreviated text is used (for example:
M – mud, R – rock, Wk – wreck).
The chartplotter set up menu provides the sub-menu CUSTOMIZE CHART , which lets you determine how chart features are displayed. You can set the icon display of many features to custom. You then use the CUSTOM soft key to switch the customized icons off/on. The factory default for the CUSTOM options is on.
The chart features controlled from the Customize Chart menu are grouped as detailed below, some groups are sub-divided into categories
Menu Option
CHART TEXT
CHART BOUNDARIES
SPOT SOUNDINGS
DEPTH SHADING LIMIT
DEPTH CONTOURS
DEPTH CONTOUR DISPLAY
NAV MARKS
Chart Features
Names
Chart Boundaries
Spot Soundings
Reference Depth
Depths (Bathymetric Lines)
Depth Labels
Depth Contour Range
Lights:
Light
Light moire’ effect
Light float
Light vessel
Buoys and Beacons:
Buoy, cardinal
Buoy, installation
Buoy, isolated danger
Buoy, lateral
Buoy, safe water
Buoy, special purpose
Buoy, generic
Beacon, cardinal
Beacon, isolated danger
Beacon, lateral
Beacon, safe water
Beacon, special purpose
Beacon, generic
Signals:
Anchor
Cairn
Chain/Wire
Fog signal
Radar reflector
Top mark
Nav aid, generic
Extended nav aid, generic
Radar station
Radar transponder beacon
Radio station
LIGHT SECTORS Light Sectors
81213_1.book Page 2 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
C-2
Menu Option
MARINE FEATURES
Chart Features
CAUTION & ROUTING DATA Caution Areas:
Caution area
Fishing facility
Marine farm/culture
Cable, submarine
Cable area
Offshore prod’n area
Pipeline
Pipeline area
Anchor berth
Anchorage area
Cargo transhipment area
Contiguous zone
Continental shelf area
Custom zone
Dumping ground
Exclusive economic zone
Fishery zone
Fishing ground
Free port area
Harbour area (administrative)
Incineration area
Log pond
National territorial area
Sea area
Spoil ground
Straight territorial sea baseline
Submarine transit lane
Territorial sea area
Restricted area
Sea Plane landing area
Military practice area
Tideways & Currents:
Tideway
Water turbulence
Tide height
Tracks and Routes:
Deep water route part
Deep water route centerline
Fairway
Ferry route
Navigation line
Precautionary area
Radar line
Radar range
Radio calling
Recommended route centerline
Recommended track
Recommended traffic lane part
Traffic separation line
Traffic separation, scheme boundary
Traffic separation, scheme crossing
Traffic separation, scheme lane part
Traffic separation, scheme roundabout
Traffic separation zone
Two-way route part
Seabed bottom:
Sand waves
Seabed area
Spring
Weed/Kelp
HD Series Fishfinders
81213_1.book Page 3 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Appendix C: C-MAP Chart Card Features
Menu Option
LAND FEATURES
ICON DISPLAY
Chart Features
Natural Features:
Coastline
Dune
Hill
Land elevation
Land region
Land
Salt pan
Slope topline
Tree
Vegetation area
Natural Features - Rivers
Canal
Canal bank
Rapids
River
River bank
Waterfall
Lake
Lake shore
Complex (detailed) object/Simple object
Cultural Features:
Airport area
Built-up area
Railway
Road crossing
Road part
Runway
Sloping ground
Square
Cable, overhead
Fence
Pipeline, overhead
Pylon
Telepheric
Tunnel entrance
Tank
Building, religious
Building, single
Cemetery
Fortified Structure
Siloway route part
Chimney
Dish aerial
Flagstaff/flagpole
Flarestack
Mast
Monument
Radar dome plane landing area
Tower
Windmill
Windmotor
C-3
81213_1.book Page 4 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
C-4 HD Series Fishfinders
Menu option
PORTS
The following chart features are always displayed:
Chart features
Ports:
Berthing facility
Causeway
Checkpoint
Crane
Dam
Distance mark
Dock area
Dry dock
Dyke area
Dyke crown
Floating dock
Gate
Gridiron
Harbour facility
Hulk
Landing place
Landing stairs
Lock basin
Oil barrier
Pile
Pontoon
Ramp
Shoreline construction
Slipway
Weir
Small craft facility
Services:
Coast Guard station
Pilot boarding place
Rescue station
Signal station, traffic
Signal station, warning
Port Information:
Port area
Harbour master
Coast Guard
Police
Customs
Health emergency
Post office
Yacht club
Boat yard
Accessories
Electrical/electronic repairs
Engine repairs
Sailmaker
Fishing/diving gear, SCUBA
Hotel/Inn
Restaurant
Bank/Exchange office
Pharmacy
Port/Marina
Slipway
Boat hoist
Crane
Fuel station
Water
Electricity
Showers
Launderette
Public toilets
Post box
Public telephone
Refuse bin
Visitor’s berth
Chandler
Provisions
Bottle gas
Car Parking
Parking for boat and trailers
Caravan site
Camping site
Sewerage pump-out station
CARTOGRAPHIC
OBJECTS
NATURAL FEATURES
Line, generic
Area, generic
Land area
Bridge
ROCKS Underwater Rock
WRECKS Wrecks
81213_1.book Page 5 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Appendix C: C-MAP Chart Card Features
The following chart features are always displayed:
Menu option
DEPTHS 1
Chart features
Depth area
DEPTHS 2
DEPTHS 3
PORTS
CAUTION AREAS
OFFSHORE INSTALLA-
TIONS
CARTOGRAPHIC AREAS
Dredged area
Intertidal area
Mooring/Warping facility
Fish haven
Diffuser
Obstruction
Production installation
Offshore platform
AREAS, LIMITS
CARTOGRAPHIC
OBJECTS
No data area
Incomplete survey area
NATURAL FEATURES (Ice) Ice area
Pingo
COMPOSITE OBJECTS Airport
Anchorage
Channel edge
Deep water route
Defined water
Harbour
Range system
Lighthouse
Mooring trot
Navigation mark, afloat
Navigation mark, fixed in point
Traffic Separation Scheme
System
Cartographic II25 area
C-5
81213_1.book Page 6 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
C-6 HD Series Fishfinders
81213_1.book Page 1 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Appendix D: SeaTalk and NMEA Data
Appendix D: SeaTalk and NMEA Data
The following table defines the data received on the NMEA/SeaTalk ports.
Data sources are listed in order of priority except where indicated.
D-1
Data Received
Position (LAT/LON)
Position (Loran C TD’s)
Speed and Course Over Ground
Waypoint Data
Depth
Apparent Wind Angle and Speed
Boat Speed Through Water
Total Log and Trip Log
Water Temperature
Source
SeaTalk, GGA, RMC, RMA, GLL
GLC, RMA, GTD
SeaTalk, RMC, RMA, VTG
SeaTalk, RMB, APB, BWC, BWR, RMB, XTE
SeaTalk, DBT, DPT
SeaTalk, MWV (relative)
SeaTalk, VHW
SeaTalk, VLW
SeaTalk, MTW
Average Boat Speed through the Water
Heading
Locked Heading
Magnetic Variation
Rudder Angle (not displayed)
Time (No priority)
SeaTalk only
HDG, HDM, HDT, VHW, SeaTalk,
SeaTalk only (Autopilot / Steering Compass)
SeaTalk, RMC, RMA, HDG
SeaTalk only
SeaTalk, ZDA, GGA, RMC, GLL, BWC, BWR
Date
MOB data
SeaTalk, ZDA, RMC
SeaTalk only
Autopilot Status (Standby / Auto / Vane / Track) SeaTalk only
Cursor Range and Bearing (from Chartplotter)
Cursor Range and Bearing (from Radar)
SeaTalk only
SeaTalk, RSD
SeaTalk Only Global Alarms - Watch alarm, Wind alarm,
Autopilot alarms, Depth alarms.
Waypoint arrival
Waypoint/Route Transfer
SeaTalk, RMB, APB
SeaTalk, WPL, RTE
* If Magnetic Heading is not available, the True Heading and Variation (if available) are used to generate the magnetic heading.
81213_1.book Page 2 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
D-2 HD Series Fishfinders
The HD Series display unit transmits the following data, if available, on
SeaTalk:
Data Output
Position (LAT/LON)
Position (Loran C TD’s)
Speed Over Ground and
Course Over Ground
Waypoint Data
Depth
Apparent Wind Angle and Speed ✔
Boat Speed Through Water ✔
✔
✔
Total Log and Trip Log
Water Temperature
✔
✔
Heading
Magnetic Variation
Time
Date
MOB data
Cursor Range & Bearing
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
EBL/VRM Data —
SeaTalk
✔
✔
✔
Heading mode
Radar display range
Radar Tracked targets
Waypoint/Route Transfer
Global Alarm
Waypoint Arrival Alarm
—
✔
—
—
SeaTalk
NMEA Out
GGA, GLL, RMC
RMA
RMC, VTG 1 ,
,
1
RMA
, RMA
RMB, APB, BWC, BWR
DBT, DPT 2
—
VHW 2
VLW 2
MTW 2
VHW 2,3
RMA, RMC
ZDA
ZDA
—
RSD
4
RSD
4
RSD 4
RSD
4
TTM
4
WPL, RTE
—
APB, RMB
1
1 When available, NMEA OUT data is transmitted from a combined Fishfinder/Chartplotter display or
from a Fishfinder-only unit if connected to a Chart display via hsb 2 .
2 Fishfinder data.
3 Bridged from NMEA if selected in the System Set Up menu.
4 When available, NMEA OUT data is transmitted from a Fishfinder display only if connected to a Radar display via hsb 2 .
81213_1.book Page 1 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Appendix E: Abbreviations
Appendix E: Abbreviations
A
ANSI
AWG
BDI
Brg
CCFL
CDI
CFR
CMG
COG
CRT
CTR dB
DC
DMG
DR
DSM
EBL
EMC
ETA
FCC
FLT ft
FTC
GPS dGPS
GRD
GHz
Amp
American National Standards Institute
American Wire Gauge
Bearing and Distance Indicator
Bearing
Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamp
Course Deviation Indicator
Code of Federal Regulations
Course Made Good
Course Over Ground
Cathode Ray Tube
Center deciBels
Direct Current
Distance Made Good
Dead Reckoning
Digital Sounder Module
Electronic Bearing Line
Electro Magnetic Compatibility
Estimated Time of Arrival
Federal Communication Commission
Float - floating EBL/VRM feet
Fast Time Constant
Global Positioning System differential Global Positioning System
Guard Zone
Giga Hertz
HD High Definition display
HDG Heading hsb 2 Speed
Hz Hertz
MHz Mega Hertz
IEEE in, "
Institute of Electrical & Electronic Engineers inch
E-1
81213_1.book Page 2 Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
E-2
V
VHF
VMG
VRM
WPT
XTE yds
ZMB
POS
RC
RF
Rng rpm
SHM
SSB
SOG
STC
T
TFT
TTG
Kg
Kts kW lat lbs
LCD lon/long
M m
MARPA
MBS mm
MOB
MRK nm
NMEA kilogram knots kilo Watt latitude pounds
Liquid Crystal Display longitude
Magnetic meters
Mini Automatic Radar Plotting Aid
Main Bang Suppression millimeter
Man OverBoard
Mark nautical mile
National Marine Electronics Association
Position (of vessel)
Raychart (chartplotter)
Radio Frequency
Range
Revolutions Per Minute
Ships Heading Marker
Single Side Band
Speed Over Ground
Sensitivity Time Control
True
Thin Film Transistor
Time To Go
Volts
Very High Frequency
Velocity Made Good
Variable Range Marker
Waypoint
Cross Track Error yards
Zoom Box
HD Series Fishfinders
81213_1.book Page i Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Index
Index
A
Accessories 2-4
Adding a Waypoint to a Route 7-19
,
7-29
Alarms 6-8
Alarm Clock 8-4
Anchor 8-4
Arrival 7-32 , 8-4
Countdown Timer 8-4
Deep Water 6-8
External 6-9
,
8-4
Fish Alarm 6-8
Grounding 8-4
MOB 6-13 , 8-6
Off Track 8-4
Setting 8-1
Shallow Water 6-8
ALARMS Key 3-8 , 6-8 , 6-9 , 8-4 , 8-5
Altering The Current Route 7-30
Anchor Alarm 8-4
Arrival Alarm 7-32 , 8-4
A-Scope 1-11
,
5-19
Auto Update 9-8
Autopilot Pop Up 4-4 , 4-8
B
Background Color 5-2
BDI Window Options 1-6
,
5-5
,
5-7
Bearing Mode 4-4 , 4-6
Bottom Indications 6-3
Bottom Lock 1-10 , 5-17
Bridge NMEA Heading 4-9
Brightness Control 5-1
C
Cable Runs 2-10
Installation Considerations 2-2
Cables
HSB 2-18
Power 2-15 , 2-19
Transducer 2-21
Cancel MOB 6-14 , 8-7
CDI Window Options 1-6
,
5-5
,
5-7
Center the Chart 1-13
,
5-25
Chart
Center 1-13
Data 7-2
Nearest 7-7
Object Information 4-17
,
4-19
,
7-4
Port 7-4 , 7-5
Source 7-4
Tide 7-4 , 7-6
Definition 1-3
Master 1-3
Mode 1-6 , 5-5
Moving 5-25
Orientation 4-17 , 4-18
Course Up 4-18
Head Up 4-19
North Up 4-18
Scale 5-25 , 7-2 , 7-20 , 8-6
Set Up
Radar/Chart Synch 1-13 , 4-17
Simulator 4-13
Window Options 1-6
,
5-5
,
5-7
Chart Card 1-4 , 1-13
Object Information 4-17 , 4-19 , 7-4
Chartplotter
Control Functions 5-23
Display Options 1-14
Features 1-13
,
A-3
Functions 1-16
Set Up 4-2 , 4-17
Radar/Chart Synch 4-20
Cleaning Instructions 9-2
CLEAR Key 3-8
Clearing a Route 7-19 a Track 7-39 , 7-40
COG (Course Over Ground) 8-1
Data Box 4-4
,
5-8
Vector 4-17
,
4-19
Color Bar 4-13 , 4-14
Color Gain 6-7
Color Threshold 5-3
Combined Display
Definition 1-3
Compass Set Up 4-5 , 4-12
Connections 2-15 , 2-19
Display Unit 2-15
DSM250 2-19
HSB 2-15
,
2-19
,
2-25
,
2-26
NMEA Input 2-15
,
2-27
,
2-31
NMEA Output 2-15 , 2-32 , 2-34
Power 2-15 , 2-19
Power & NMEA In 2-15 , 2-16 , 2-31
SeaTalk 2-15
,
2-27
,
2-29
Transducer 2-15
,
2-19
,
2-21
Context-sensitive Cursor 3-7
,
5-25
Control Functions
Chartplotter 5-23
Display Unit 3-5 , 5-4
Conventions Used v
Countdown Timer Alarm 8-4 i
81213_1.book Page ii Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM ii
Course Up 4-18
Creating a Route 7-19 from a Track 7-42 using the Waypoint List 7-21
Cross Track Error - See XTE
Current Route 7-18
Altering 7-30
Cursor 3-5 , 3-6
Context-sensitive 3-7
,
5-25
Goto 7-30
Readout 4-4 , 4-7
Reference 4-4 , 4-6
Cursor Data Box 5-11 , 5-23
Cursor Echo 4-5 , 4-11 , 8-1 , 8-7
Chart 4-11
,
8-7
Local 4-11
,
8-7
Radar 4-11 , 8-7
Custom Options - Chart 5-24
Customizing the Chart Display 4-17 the Screen Presentation Options 5-23
D
Data
HSB 8-1 hsb 2 8-1
Data Box 4-4
,
4-6
,
5-11
,
5-23
COG 4-4 , 5-8
Cross Track Error 4-4
Cursor 5-23
Date 4-4
Depth 4-4
,
5-8
Group of Six 5-11
,
5-23
On/Off 5-24
Heading 4-4
List of 4-4
Log/Trip 4-4
MOB 6-13
,
8-6
Moving 5-24
Pilot 4-4
Position 4-4 , 5-8
Ruler 8-2 , 8-3
SOG 4-4
,
5-8
Speed 4-4
,
5-8
Temperature 4-4 , 5-8
Tide Set/Drift 4-4
Time 4-4
VMG 4-4
Waypoint 4-4
,
5-8
Wind 4-4
Data Display 7-26
Chart Object 7-4
Nearest 7-7
Port 7-4
,
7-5
Source 7-4
HD Series Fishfinders
Tide 7-4 , 7-6
Route 7-19
Data Display Window 5-8
Data from other Equipment 2-33
,
6-13
,
8-1
,
8-6
COG 8-1
Heading 6-13 , 8-1 , 8-6
NMEA 8-1
Position 6-13 , 8-1 , 8-6
Radar 8-1
SeaTalk 8-1
Speed 6-13 , 8-6
Data Log Mode 1-6 , 5-5 , 8-1 , 8-10
Database List 3-5 , 3-11
Route 7-15 , 7-19 , 7-22 , 7-26
Track 7-41
Waypoint 6-11
,
6-12
,
7-8
,
7-9
,
7-20
,
7-33
Date Data Box 4-4
Date Format 4-5 , 4-12
Datum Selection 4-17 , 4-20
Day/Night 4-4
,
4-7
Dedicated Keys 1-4
,
3-5
,
3-8
ALARMS 6-8
,
6-9
,
8-4
,
8-5
CLEAR 3-8
DISPLAY 1-6 , 5-4 , 5-6 , 5-10 , 8-10
GAIN 6-5
MARKS 6-11
,
6-13
,
6-14
,
7-9
,
7-12
,
7-36
,
7-37
,
8-6
MENU 3-12
,
4-1
,
4-2
,
7-39
,
8-9
MULTI 5-1 , 5-2 , 5-3 , 5-13
POWER 3-1 , 3-4
RANGE 5-13 , 5-27 , 7-2
VRM/EBL 6-9
,
8-1
,
8-3
Deep Water Alarm 6-8
Deleting - See Erasing 7-15
Depth
Determining Using VRM 6-9
Digit Size 4-13 , 4-14
Offset 4-13
,
4-15
Depth Data Box 4-4 , 5-8
Depth/Temp Window Option 1-6 , 5-5 , 5-7
Digital Sounder Module
Definition 1-4
Display
Brightness 5-1
Cleaning 9-2
Features 1-5
Lighting 5-1
Operating Modes 1-6
Selecting 5-4
DISPLAY Key 1-6
,
3-8
,
5-4
,
5-6
,
5-10
,
8-10
Display Options
Chartplotter 1-14
Display Unit 1-4
Background Color 5-2
Connections 2-15
Console Mounting 2-12
81213_1.book Page iii Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Index
Location 2-6
Mounting 2-12
Specification A-1
Switching Off 3-4
Displaying
Chart Data 7-3
Waypoint Data 7-9 , 7-13 , 7-26
Distance
Determining Using VRM 6-9
DSM250 1-5
Connections 2-19
Mounting 2-13
Mounting Location 2-9
E
Echoes
Color Threshold 5-3
Fishfinder 1-8 , 5-1
Strength 6-1
Editing a Route 7-19
,
7-28
Using the ST80 Navigator Keypad 7-18 a Waypoint 7-9
Waypoint Details 7-13
Using the ST80 Navigator Keypad 7-18
EMC
Conformance 2-23
Installation Guidelines 2-2
Servicing and Safety Guidelines 9-3
ENTER Key 3-8
Erasing a Route 7-19 a Waypoint 7-9
,
7-15
Error codes 3-1 , 9-7
External Alarms 6-9 , 8-4
F
Factory Reset 9-4
,
9-5
Features
Chartplotter 1-5 , 1-13 , A-3
Display 1-5
Fishfinder 1-5 , 1-8 , A-3
Find Ship 5-25
Fish Alarm 6-8
Fish Indications 6-2
Fishfinder
Definition 1-3
Display Options 1-10
A-Scope 1-11
,
5-19
Bottom Lock 5-17
White Line 6-2 , 6-4
Zoom 1-11
Echoes 1-8 , 5-1
Features 1-8
,
A-3
Full Screen Mode 1-6
Functions 1-11
HSB Mode 4-13 , 4-14
Set Up 4-2
,
4-13
Simulator 4-14
,
4-16
,
5-1
Fishfinder Controls
Color Gain 6-7
Gain 6-5
Range 5-13
Scroll Speed 5-11
STC 6-7
Fishfinder Image
Adjusting 6-1
Interpreting 6-1
Bottom Indications 6-3
Fish Indications 6-2
Fishfinder Master 1-3
Fishfinder System 1-4
Follow a Route 7-30
Stop 7-30
Frequency 1-10
,
6-3
Split Frequency 5-16
Transducer 5-16
Functions
Chartplotter 1-16
Fishfinder 1-11
G
Gain 6-5
GAIN Key 3-8
,
6-5
Goto a Target 7-30 a Waypoint 7-30
Cursor 7-30
Stop 7-30
GPS
Set Up 8-1
,
8-9
GPS SOG/COG Filter 4-5
,
4-12
Ground Connection 2-16, 2-20
H
Half-Screen Windows 1-6, 5-7
Horizontal 1-6
,
5-5
Vertical 1-7 , 5-8
Head Up 4-19
Heading 4-9 , 6-13 , 8-6
Data 8-1
Heading Data Box 4-4
Heading Vector 4-17 , 4-19
Help 4-4 , 4-7 from Raymarine 9-9
High Voltage iii
Horizontal Half-Screen Windows 1-6
,
5-5 iii
81213_1.book Page iv Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM iv
HSB
Cable 2-18
Connection 2-15 , 2-19
Data 8-1
Mode, Sonar 4-13
,
4-14 hsb 2 1-4
Connection 2-25 , 2-26
Data 8-1
I
In-hull Transducer 1-5
Installation
Cable Runs 2-2 , 2-10
EMC Conformance 2-23
EMC Guidelines 2-4
Integrated System 2-24
Location 2-2 , 2-6 , 2-9
Integrated System 1-8 , 7-19
Definition 1-3
Diagram 2-26
Installation 2-24
Installation Checks 2-34
Intended Use iii
J
Junction Box for External Instruments 2-31
K
Key Beep 4-4 , 4-7
Keys
Dedicated 1-4
,
3-5
Dedicated Keys 3-8
Lighting 5-1
Soft 1-4 , 3-5 , 3-9 , 4-4 , 4-7
L
Language 4-6 , 4-12
LED, Status 3-1 , 9-7
Lighting Control
Display 5-1
Key 5-1
Local Cursor Echo 4-11
,
8-7
Location
Display Unit 2-6
Sounder Module 2-9
Log/Trip Data Box 4-4
Loran TDs 7-10
HD Series Fishfinders
M
Maintenance 9-1
Make and Follow a Route Scenario 7-46
Man Overboard (MOB) - See MOB
Managing Tracks 7-39
Marks 7-8
MARKS Key 3-8
,
6-11
,
6-13
,
6-14
,
7-9
,
7-12
,
7-36 , 7-37 , 8-6
Master Display 1-3, 1-8 , 2-25
Measuring Distances Using the VRM/EBL Key 8-1
MENU Key 3-8 , 3-12 , 4-1 , 4-2 , 7-39 , 8-9
Menu Timeout 4-4
,
4-8
MOB 6-13 , 8-1
Alarm 6-13 , 8-6
Cancel 6-14 , 8-7
Data Box 6-13 , 8-6
Data Selection 4-4
,
4-8
Symbol 6-13
,
8-6
Waypoint 6-13 , 8-6
Modes 1-6
Chart 1-6 , 5-5
Data Log 1-6
,
5-5
,
8-1
,
8-10
Full Screen 5-4
Radar 1-6 , 5-5
Sonar 1-6 , 5-5
Mounting
Display Unit 2-12
DSM250 2-13
Moving a Waypoint 7-9 , 7-15 , 7-19
Around the Chart 7-20
Data Boxes 5-24 the Cursor 3-6
MULTI Key 3-8
,
5-1
,
5-2
,
5-3
,
5-13
N
Name a Route 7-19 , 7-22
Using the ST80 Navigator Keypad 7-18 a Waypoint 7-9
,
7-13
,
7-14
Using the ST80 Navigator Keypad 7-18
Nav Data
Window Options 1-6 , 5-5
Navigation Aid iii
NMEA 1-8
,
2-30
Data 2-30
,
8-1
Heading 4-9
Input Connection 2-15 , 2-27 , 2-31
Output Connection 2-15 , 2-32 , 2-34
Output Set Up 4-5 , 4-10
North Up 4-18
81213_1.book Page v Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Index
O
Object Information - Chart 4-17
,
4-19
Displaying 7-4
Off Track Alarm 8-4
Offsetting the Center 1-13
Operating Controls
Cursor 3-5
,
3-6
Database List 3-5 , 3-11
Dedicated Keys 1-4 , 3-5 , 3-8
Pop-up Menus 3-5 , 3-10
Soft Keys 1-4 , 3-5 , 3-9 , 4-4 , 4-7
Trackpad 1-4
,
3-5
,
3-6
,
5-25
Operating Modes 1-6
Data Log 8-1 , 8-10
Plotter 4-18 , 5-28
Selecting 5-4
Orientation - Chart 4-18
P
Palette 4-17 , 4-19
Picture Reset 9-4
Pilot Data Box 4-4
Place and Goto a Waypoint Scenario 7-44
Placing a Waypoint 6-11 , 7-9 , 7-20
Plotter Mode 4-17 , 4-18 , 5-28
Pop-up Menus 3-5 , 3-10
Port Data 7-4
,
7-5
Position 6-13
,
8-1
,
8-6 a Waypoint 7-9 , 7-13
Position Data Box 4-4 , 5-8
Position Offset 4-17 , 4-20
Power
Cable 2-19
Connection 2-15
,
2-19 for External Equipment 2-17 , 2-24
Power & NMEA Input
Connection 2-15 , 2-16 , 2-31
POWER Key 3-1
,
3-4
,
3-8
Power Setting 5-13
Power-on Reset 9-4
,
9-5
Power-on Sequence 3-1
Chart Mode 3-3
R
Radar
Display 1-3
Master 1-3
Mode 1-6 , 5-5
Overlay 8-1
,
8-7
Repeater 1-3
Typical System Diagram 2-1
Window Options 1-6 , 5-5
Radar/Chart Synch 1-13 , 4-17 , 4-20
Range
Fishfinder 5-13
RANGE Key 3-8
,
5-13
,
5-27
,
7-2
Raystar 120 WAAS GPS Receiver B-6
Remote Cursor Echo
Chart 4-11 , 8-7
Radar 4-11 , 8-7
Removing a Waypoint from a Route 7-19
,
7-29
Repeater Display 1-8 , 2-25 , 7-19
Definition 1-3
Restart
XTE 7-30 , 7-33
Retrieving a Route 7-19
Returning to Full-Screen Display 5-10
Review Your Passage Plan Scenario 7-48
Route
Clearing 7-19
Creating 7-19
Creating from a Track 7-42
Current 7-18
Data Display 7-19
Database List 7-15 , 7-19 , 7-22 , 7-26
Editing 7-19
,
7-28
Using the ST80 Navigator Keypad 7-18
Erasing 7-19
Follow 7-30
Naming 7-19 , 7-22
NMEA Transfer 7-35
Retrieving 7-19
Saving 7-19
Transfer 7-19
Route Leg 7-18
Data Display 7-25
Routine Checks 9-1
Ruler Data Box 8-2
,
8-3
S
Safety iii , 7-1
EMC Guidelines 2-4
High Voltage iii
Navigation Aid iii
Saving a Route 7-19
Scale
Chart 5-25
,
7-2
,
7-20
,
8-6
Scenarios
Make & Follow a Route 7-46
Place & Goto a Waypoint 7-44
Review Your Passage Plan 7-48
Scroll Speed 5-11
Scrolling Bottom Graph 1-8 v
81213_1.book Page vi Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM vi
SeaTalk 1-8 , 2-29
Connection 2-15 , 2-27 , 2-29
Data 2-29 , 4-11 , 8-1 , 8-7
Selecting a Waypoint 7-9 the Operating Mode 5-4
Sensitivity - See Gain 6-5
Servicing
EMC Guidelines 9-3
Setting Alarms and Timers 8-1
Setting Up a GPS 8-1 , 8-9
Chart Parameters 4-2 , 4-17
Custom Options 5-24
Fishfinder Parameters 4-2
,
4-13
System Parameters 4-2
Tracks 7-39 , 7-40
Shallow Water Alarm 6-8
Simulator 3-11 , 4-6 , 4-13
Chart 3-11
,
5-1
Fishfinder 4-16
,
5-1
Sonar 3-12
,
4-14
,
4-16
SmartRoute 7-42
Soft Key Labels 4-7
Soft Keys 1-4 , 3-5 , 3-9 , 4-4 , 4-7
Software Updates 9-8
SOG (Speed Over Ground) Data Box 4-4
,
5-8
Sonar- See also Fishfinder
Display Options
A-Scope 5-19
Bottom Lock 5-17
Zoom 5-20
Master 1-3
Mode 1-6 , 5-5
Repeater 1-3
Simulator 3-11 , 3-12 , 4-16
Switching Control Between Sonar and Other
Modes 5-10
Window Options 1-6 , 5-5 , 5-7 , 5-9
Sonar History 4-13 , 4-15
Sonar HSB Mode 4-13 , 4-14
Sonar Interference Rejection 4-14 , 4-15
Sonar Simulator 4-14
,
4-16
Specifications
Display Units A-1
DSM250 A-4
Speed 6-13 , 8-6
Calibration 4-13
,
4-15
Data Box 4-4
,
5-8
Fishfinder Scroll 5-11
Split Frequency 5-16
ST80 Navigator Keypad 7-16
Status Bar 1-9 , 1-13
Status LED 3-1
,
9-7
STC 6-7
HD Series Fishfinders
Stop
Follow 7-30
Goto 7-30
Track - See Clear Track
Switching
Control Between Sounder and Other Modes
5-10
Data Boxes On/Off 5-24
Range Rings On and Off 5-23 the Cursor Data Box On and Off 5-23 the Display On and Off 3-4
Symbol
MOB 6-13 , 8-6
Waypoint 4-17 , 4-19 , 7-8 , 7-13
Synchronize Chart and Radar 4-17
System
Connections 2-15 , 2-19
Set Up 4-2
T
Target (Chart) 7-30
Arrival 7-30
Goto 7-30
Waypoint 7-30
Target Depth ID 4-13
,
4-14
Temperature Calibration 4-13
,
4-15
Temperature Data Box 4-4
,
5-8
Terminology 1-3
Thru-hull Transducer 1-5
Tide Data 7-4 , 7-6
Tide Set/Drift Data Box 4-4
Tide Vector 4-17
,
4-19
Time Data Box 4-4
Time Format 4-5 , 4-12
Time Offset 4-5 , 4-12
Timers
Countdown 8-4
Setting 8-1
Trackpad 1-4
,
3-5
,
3-6
,
5-25
Tracks
Clearing 7-39 , 7-40
Converting to Route 7-42
Database List 7-41
Managing 7-39
,
7-40
Naming
Using the ST80 Navigator Keypad 7-18
Setting Up 7-39
Transducer v
,
1-5
Cable 2-21
Cleaning 9-2
Connections 2-15 , 2-19 , 2-21
Frequency 5-16 , 6-3
In-hull 1-5
Thru-hull 1-5
81213_1.book Page vii Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM
Index
Transom Mount 1-5
Transfer
Route 7-19
Transom Mount Transducer 1-5
U
Units 4-4 , 4-8
Updating Software 9-8
V
Variation Source 4-5
,
4-8
Vectors 4-17 , 4-19
Vertical Half-Screen Windows 1-7 , 5-5 , 5-8
VMG Data Box 4-4
VRM/EBL Key 3-8
,
6-9
,
8-1
,
8-3
W
WAAS 1-1 , B-6
Warning codes 3-1 , 9-7
Warranty vi
Waypoint 4-17
,
4-19
,
8-6
Adding to a Route 7-19 , 7-29
Data Box 4-4 , 5-8
Data Display 7-8 , 7-9 , 7-13 , 7-26
Database List 6-11 , 6-12 , 7-8 , 7-9 , 7-20 , 7-33
Editing 7-9
Using the ST80 Navigator Keypad 7-18
Editing Details 7-13
Erasing 7-9 , 7-15
Goto 7-30
List 7-13
,
7-15
Moving 7-9
,
7-15
,
7-19
Naming 7-9 , 7-13 , 7-14
Numbers 4-17 , 4-19
Placing 6-11 , 7-8 , 7-9 , 7-20
Position 7-9
,
7-13
Removing from a Route 7-19
,
7-29
Selecting 7-9
Symbol 4-17 , 4-19 , 7-8 , 7-9 , 7-13
Target 7-30
Transfer 7-8 , 7-18
Transferring on NMEA 7-35
Transferring on SeaTalk 7-35
Waypoint List
Creating a Route 7-21
White Line 6-2 , 6-4
Wind Data Box 4-4
Window Options
BDI 1-6
,
5-5
,
5-7
CDI 1-6
,
5-5
,
5-7
Chart 1-6 , 5-5 , 5-7
Depth/Temp 1-6 , 5-5 , 5-7
Full Screen 1-6 , 5-5
Half Screen 1-6
Horizontal Half-Screen 1-6 , 5-5
Nav Data 1-6
,
5-5
Radar 1-6
,
5-5
Sonar 1-6 , 5-5 , 5-7 , 5-9
Vertical Half-Screen 1-7 , 5-5 , 5-8
World Map 1-13 , 7-2
X
XTE (Cross Track Error)
Data Box 4-4
Restart 7-30 , 7-33
Z
Zoom 1-11
,
1-13
,
5-20 vii
81213_1.book Page viii Monday, March 17, 2003 1:14 PM viii HD Series Fishfinders

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement